biblatex-oxref (4mar18)

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@46852 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751

28 files changed, 4455 insertions, 883 deletions

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/Makefile b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/Makefile
index b93f5db01e4..4c468d7f97a 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/Makefile
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/Makefile
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ UTREE = $(shell kpsewhich --var-value TEXMFHOME)
 
 .PHONY: source clean distclean inst uninst install uninstall zip ctan
 
-all:	$(NAME).pdf $(STY1)-doc.pdf $(STY2)-doc.pdf $(STY3)-doc.pdf $(STY4)-doc.pdf clean
+all:	$(NAME).pdf $(STY1)-doc.pdf $(STY2)-doc.pdf $(STY3)-doc.pdf $(STY4)-doc.pdf
 	@exit 0
 
 source $(NAME).bbx american-$(NAME).lbx british-$(NAME).lbx english-$(NAME).lbx $(STY1)-doc.tex $(STY1).bbx $(STY1).cbx $(STY1).dbx $(STY2)-doc.tex $(STY2).bbx $(STY2).cbx $(STY2).dbx $(STY3)-doc.tex $(STY3).bbx $(STY3).cbx $(STY3).dbx $(STY4)-doc.tex $(STY4).bbx $(STY4).cbx $(STY4).dbx: $(NAME).dtx
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph-doc.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph-doc.pdf
index 979f914bcd1..b50c5a7054a 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph-doc.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph-doc.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph-doc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph-doc.tex
index dfe2e6e7415..4921a90cfb8 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph-doc.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph-doc.tex
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
 %% See:     http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
 %% ----------------------------------------------------------------
 %% 
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
 \ProvidesFile{oxalph-doc.tex}
     [\Version\space Alphabetic biblatex style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
 \PassOptionsToPackage{style=oxalph,varissuedate,anon}{biblatex}
@@ -137,6 +137,8 @@
 \DeclareSourcemap{%
   \maps[datatype=bibtex]{%
     \map[overwrite=true]{%
+      \pertype{legislation}
+      \pertype{legal}
       \step[fieldset=shorthand, null=true]
     }%
   }%
@@ -265,25 +267,25 @@ The style is self-contained, so you can load it with \pkg{biblatex}:
 
 The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
 
-\begin{docKey}{altthesis}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
-  Puts the thesis type inside, rather than outside, the parenthetical publication block.
-\end{docKey}
-
 \begin{docKey}{anon}{=\val{literal}|\val{long}|\val{short}}{default \val{short}, initially \val{literal}}
   Affects what happens if the author name matches the value of \cs{oxrefanon}.
-  By default, this is ‘Anonymous’, but you could change it a different word (such as ‘Anonimo’) instead.
+  By default, this is \enquote{Anonymous}, but you could change it a different word (such as \enquote{Anonimo}) instead.
   \begin{itemize}
   \item\docValue{literal}
     means no special handling is used.
   \item\docValue{long}
-    will print the unabbreviated localization string \code{anon} (‘Anonymous’) instead of the author name
+    will print the unabbreviated localization string \code{anon} (\enquote{Anonymous}) instead of the author name
     in the bibliography.
   \item\docValue{short}
-    will print the abbreviated localization string \code{anon} (‘Anon.\@’) instead of the author name
+    will print the abbreviated localization string \code{anon} (\enquote{Anon.\@}) instead of the author name
     in the bibliography.
   \end{itemize}
 \end{docKey}
 
+\begin{docKey}{bookseries}{=\val{in}|\val{out}}{default \val{in}, initially \val{in}}
+  Puts the series information for a book \docValue{in}side or \docValue{out}side the parenthetical publication block.
+\end{docKey}
+
 \begin{docKey}{court-plain}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
   Prints courts of decision without parentheses.
 \end{docKey}
@@ -308,32 +310,42 @@ The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
   Surrounds URLs with angle brackets.
 \end{docKey}
 
+\begin{docKey}{issuedate-plain}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
+  Removes the parentheses around the date of a periodical without a volume number.
+  This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
+  (This option was previously called \key{varissuedate}.)
+\end{docKey}
+
 \begin{docKey}{issuestyle}{=\val{slash}|\val{colon}|\val{comma}|\val{parens}}{default \val{slash}, initially \val{slash}}
   Affects how journal volumes and numbers are printed.
   \begin{itemize}
   \item\docValue{slash}
-    separates the two with a solidus, e.g. ‘23/2’.
+    separates the two with a solidus, e.g. \enquote{23/2}.
   \item\docValue{colon}
-    separates the two with a colon and space, e.g. ‘23: 2’.
+    separates the two with a colon and space, e.g. \enquote{23: 2}.
     It is intended for use with \textsf{oxnotes}\slash\textsf{oxnum} and not recommended for this style.
   \item\docValue{comma}
-    separates the two with a comma and space, e.g. ‘23, 2’.
+    separates the two with a comma and space, e.g. \enquote{23, 2}.
   \item\docValue{parens}
-    sets off the issue number in parentheses, e.g. ‘23 (2)’.
+    sets off the issue number in parentheses, e.g. \enquote{23 (2)}.
   \end{itemize}
 \end{docKey}
 
 \begin{docKey}{mergedate}{=\val{maximum}|\val{compact}|\val{basic}|\val{minimum}|\val{year}|\val{false}}{default \val{year}, initially \val{year}}
-  Affects how the date at the start of the references relates to the date in the ‘normal’ position.
+  Affects how the date at the start of the references relates to the date in the \enquote{normal} position.
   The default value of \val{year} is intended for use with the default setting of \key{labeldate}\texttt{=}\val{year}.
-  If you set \key{labeldate} to something else, you will probably want to set this option to \val{compact} or \val{maximum}.
+  If you set \key{labeldate} to something else, you will probably want to set this option to \val{compact} or \val{maximum}. It can also be set on a per-type basis.
 \end{docKey}
 
 \begin{docKey}{nolocation}{}{no value, initially unset}
-  Replaces missing locations with ‘n.p.’ or the localized equivalent in books, collections, reference works, proceedings, and similar entry types. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
+  Replaces missing locations with \enquote{n.p.} or the localized equivalent in books, collections, reference works, proceedings, and similar entry types. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
   Alternatively, it may be set on a per-entry basis.
 \end{docKey}
 
+\begin{docKey}{nonodate}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
+  Suppresses the printing of the \code{nodate} localization string when an entry is missing a recognizable date. It can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis. It is automatically set to \val{true} for entries with a \code{sortyear}, on the assumption that the date has been given in a non-date field (e.g.\@ the number of a standard).
+\end{docKey}
+
 \begin{docKey}{nopublisher}{}{no value, initially unset}
   Removes publisher name from all entries. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
 \end{docKey}
@@ -347,6 +359,11 @@ The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
 \end{docKey}
 
 
+\begin{docKey}{thesis}{=\val{in}|\val{out}|\val{plain}}{default \val{out}, initially \val{out}}
+  Puts the thesis type \docValue{in}side or \docValue{out}side the parenthetical publication block,
+  while \docValue{plain} removes the parentheses entirely.
+\end{docKey}
+
 \begin{docKey}{timefirst}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
   Prints the time (if provided) before the date instead of after it.
   This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
@@ -358,11 +375,6 @@ The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
   This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
 \end{docKey}
 
-\begin{docKey}{varissuedate}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
-  Removes the parentheses around the date of a periodical without a volume number.
-  This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
-\end{docKey}
-
 \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} makes use of Biber-specific techniques to solve some of the challenges presented by Oxford style.
 It will not stop you from using Bib\TeX\ instead but, if you do, only simple and standard entries will work.
 In particular, manuscripts, legal references and anything involving related entries will be adversely affected.
@@ -399,7 +411,7 @@ Examples that follow standard \textsf{biblatex} semantics, and are therefore
   Code used in bibliography file.
 \end{tcolorbox}
 
-Examples that have been ‘hacked’ in some way, and are therefore not portable
+Examples that have been \enquote{hacked} in some way, and are therefore not portable
 to other styles, are in amber:
 
 \begin{tcolorbox}%
@@ -471,35 +483,17 @@ but by no means all of them will be supported.
 For information on installing the styles, and for the documented source code,
 see the separate documentation file \href{./oxref.pdf}{\texttt{oxref.pdf}}
 
-\section{To do}
+\section{Stability}
 
 The \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} family of styles is currently at \fileversion.
-As mentioned above, what the styles \emph{should} be doing is open to some
-interpretation, so at the moment I am open to the idea of changing how the
-styles handle cases not covered by the two style manuals. Please leave your
-thoughts on the GitHub issue tracker.\footnote{\url{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}}
-At some point version 1.0 will be released, after which the default (expected)
-behaviour of the styles will be fixed, though alternative behaviour may be added.
-
-I do not have any examples to work from for the following entry types, so they
-are currently untested. If you have strong feelings about how they should be
-rendered in Oxford style and can provide me with a sample reference or several,
-I would be most glad to hear from you:
-
-\begin{multicols}{3}
-  \begin{itemize}\firmlist
-    \item suppbook
-    \item booklet
-    \item suppcollection
-    \item patent
-    \item suppperiodical
-    \item artwork
-    \item commentary
-    \item letter
-    \item performance
-    \item standard
-  \end{itemize}
-\end{multicols}
+I have no further features planned, so unless there is popular demand otherwise,
+it should be bug-fix releases only between now and the release of version 1.0.
+When that happens, the default (expected) behaviour of the styles will be frozen,
+meaning I will do my best to avoid backwards-incompatible changes, though
+alternative behaviour may be added. If you spot any aspects of the styles that
+could be improved before then, especially for the cases not covered by the two
+style manuals, please leave your thoughts on the GitHub issue tracker.%
+\footnote{\url{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}}
 
 You are of course encouraged to report any bugs you discover on the
 \href{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}{GitHub issue tracker}
@@ -514,17 +508,18 @@ and indeed loads a tweaked version of a standard \textsf{biblatex} one.
 
 Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} describe a system that uses simple numbers as citation labels, almost as if they were endnotes. This system does not support page references, unlike the citation labels familiar to \LaTeX\ users. In the absence of a better idea, therefore, this style treats citation labels rather like author–year parenthetical citations and adopts the conventions from \textsf{oxyear}. Pages are set off with a colon, and multiple works are separated with a semicolon.
 
-\begin{egcite}{}
+\begin{egcite}%
+{Test [\citefield{hankinson1988mmm}{labelalpha}: 93, 96; \citefield{hankinson1989gba}{labelalpha}: 72]}
 Test \parencites%
   [93, 96]{hankinson1988mmm}%
   [72]{hankinson1989gba}
 \end{egcite}
 
-\section{Missing and inferred attribution}
+\section{Missing or inferred attribution}
 
 \subsection{Missing attribution}
 
-\tip{\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will not automatically generate anonymous labels for you, but if you use the \key{anon} option (see \cref{sec:loading}), you can transform an author name of ‘Anonymous’ (or whatever \cs{oxrefanon} is set to) in your .bib file to either the long or short localization string \code{anon}.
+\tip{\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will not automatically generate anonymous labels for you, but if you use the \key{anon} option (see \cref{sec:loading}), you can transform an author name of \enquote{Anonymous} (or whatever \cs{oxrefanon} is set to) in your .bib file to either the long or short localization string \code{anon}.
 }
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
@@ -566,7 +561,7 @@ Anon.\@ (1956), \emph{Liber usualis} (Tournai: Desclée).
 
 \subsection{Pseudepigraphy}
 Some older works are known to have been written pseudepigraphically, that is, falsely attributed to a more famous author. The way of indicating this in Oxford style, if desired, is
-to put ‘(Ps.-)’ after the name in the bibliography.
+to put \enquote{(Ps.-)} after the name in the bibliography.
 
 \tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the name with the keyword \code{pseudo}.
 }
@@ -620,7 +615,7 @@ Oxford style is to give the attribution in square brackets.
 \tip{You can also use the syntax from \textsf{biblatex-realauthor}.
   If you do not specify the \code{author}, then \code{realauthor} is treated as an alias for \code{author} annotated with the keyword \code{inferred}.
   The equivalent is true for \code{realeditor}.
-  Note, however, that \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not recognize the \code{userealauthor} and \code{userealeditor} options.}
+  Note, however, that \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not recognize the \key{userealauthor} and \key{userealeditor} options.}
 
 \subsection{Pseudonyms}
 
@@ -736,7 +731,7 @@ Kühner, R., rev. Blass, F. (1890-2), \emph{Ausführliche grammatik der griech
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\tip{Annotate \emph{either} the \code{editor} \emph{or} \code{translator} field with the keyword \code{jointauthor} to promote the name to the joint author position (you cannot do it for both). Note that you have to supply a suitable \code{shortauthor} value yourself; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not calculate it for you.}
+\tip{Annotate \emph{either} the \code{editor} \emph{or} \code{translator} field with the keyword \code{jointauthor} to promote the name to the joint author position (you cannot do it for both). Internally, what this does is move the names to the \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}-specific \code{jointauthor} field; you can use this and \code{jointauthortype} directly if you like, at the cost of portability to other styles. Note that you have to supply a suitable \code{shortauthor} value yourself; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not calculate it for you.}
 
 \section{Titular prefixes}\label{sec:nametitles}
 
@@ -878,10 +873,10 @@ Milne, A. A. (1938), \emph{Pu der Bär} [Ger. trans. of \emph{Winnie the Pooh}]
 
 For periodicals, grey literature, audiovisual and online material, the lack of a place of publication is not surprising; indeed it may be expected. For books, however, it may be remarkable and deserve marking in the bibliography with \enquote{n.p.\@} (for \enquote{no place}).
 
-\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for books, collections, reference works, proceedings and similar entry types, use the \code{nolocation} bibliography option.}
+\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for books, collections, reference works, proceedings and similar entry types, use the \key{nolocation} bibliography option.}
 
-\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for only a specific entry, use the \code{nolocation} entry option instead.
-  This has the feature of hiding the \enquote{n.p.\@} from other styles that do not follow the same convention.}
+\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for only a specific entry, use the \key{nolocation} entry option instead.
+  The advantage of doing this over simply giving \enquote{n.p.\@} as the publisher is that it hides it from other styles that do not follow the same convention.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR \S18.2.9\textdagger>
@@ -898,12 +893,31 @@ Marchetto of Padua (1961), \emph{Pomerium}, ed. G. Vecchi (n.p.).
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\section{Missing or inferred date of publication}
+
+If the date is missing from a work, you can sometimes make an educated guess
+what it should be. It is usual practice to enclose such guesses in square
+brackets.
+
+\tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the
+  \code{date}, \code{origdate}, or \code{eventdate} field with the keyword
+  \code{inferred}.}
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+  date+an = {=inferred},
+\end{tcblisting}
+
+Otherwise, if you don't supply a suitable date, it will be replaced with the
+localization string \code{nodate}. If you don't want this behaviour, you can
+suppress it with the \key{nonodate} option, which can be set globally or on a
+per-type or per-entry basis.
+
 \chapter{Articles and periodicals}\label{sec:article}
 \chapterprecis{article, periodical, suppperiodical, review}
 
 \section{Articles in periodicals with volumes/numbers}
 
-The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} consistently prefers volume and part numbers to be written like \enquote{23/2}, but also discusses formats such as \enquote{23: 2} and \enquote{23 (2)}. \emph{New Hart's Rules} adds \enquote{23, 2} as a further possibility. The latter two are better suited to \textsf{oxyear} which uses a colon to demarcate the page numbers. These variations are implemented as the option \textsf{issuestyle}; see \autoref{sec:loading} for details.
+The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} consistently prefers volume and part numbers to be written like \enquote{23/2}, but also discusses formats such as \enquote{23: 2} and \enquote{23 (2)}. \emph{New Hart's Rules} adds \enquote{23, 2} as a further possibility. The latter two are better suited to \textsf{oxalph}\slash\textsf{oxyear} which use a colon to demarcate the page numbers. These variations are implemented as the option \key{issuestyle}; see \autoref{sec:loading} for details.
 
 \spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number: Pages.}
 
@@ -976,7 +990,9 @@ Druin, A. (2002), \enquote{The Role of Children in the Design of New Technology}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}(hacked)
+<NHR \S18.8.5*\textdagger>
 {li.etal2013flh}
+Li, S. et al. (2013), \enquote{Forever Love: The Hitherto Earliest Record of Copulating Insects from the Middle Jurassic of China}, \emph{PLoS ONE}, 8/11, e78188. doi: \path{10.1371/journal.pone.0078188}
 \tcblower
 \begin{Verbatim}
 @article{li.etal2013flh,
@@ -1186,7 +1202,7 @@ Zhentao, X., Yau, K. K. C., and Stephenson, F. R. (1989) \enquote{Astronomical R
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\tip{Use \code{bookpagination} to force the display of ‘pp.’ (since the number format is odd), and \cs{DeclareNumChars*}\brackets{S} to ensure that \code{S61} is recognized as a number.}%
+\tip{Use \code{bookpagination} to force the display of \enquote{pp.} (since the number format is odd), and \cs{DeclareNumChars*}\brackets{S} to ensure that \code{S61} is recognized as a number.}%
 
 \section{Articles that span multiple issues}
 
@@ -1235,11 +1251,53 @@ Stookey, R. W. (1974), \enquote{Social Structure and Politics in the Yemen Arab
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\section{Editorials and other regular features}
+
+Strictly speaking, when a work is headed \enquote{Editorial} or \enquote{Letter to the Editor}
+in a periodical, this is a descriptor rather than a title.
+
+\tip{If a piece has a true title, the descriptor goes in the \code{note} field.
+  If it doesn't, the descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to remove the quote marks.
+  Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ball2015ed}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@suppperiodical{ball2015ed,
+  author = {Alexander Ball},
+  title = {Editorial},
+  title+an = {=descriptor},
+  date = {2015},
+  journaltitle = {International Journal of Digital Curation},
+  volume = {10},
+  number = {1},
+  pages = {i-v},
+  doi = {10.2218/ijdc.v10i1.376}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{jccm2006ed}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@suppperiodical{jccm2006ed,
+  title = {\enquote{What a Disaster} and Why Does This Question Matter?},
+  date = {2006},
+  note = {Editorial},
+  journaltitle   = {Journal of Contingencies and Crisis Management},
+  volume = {14},
+  pages = {1-2}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
 \section{Reviews}
 
 \spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{review of} ReviewedWork, \lit{in} \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number: Pages.}
 
-\tip{To get this format, use a separate entry for the reviewed item, reference it in the ‘related’ field, and use the key ‘reviewof’ as the ‘relatedtype’.}
+\tip{To get this format, use a separate entry for the reviewed item, reference it in the \enquote{related} field, and use the key \enquote{reviewof} as the \enquote{relatedtype}.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <OGS \S15.4.4\textdagger>
@@ -1407,7 +1465,7 @@ Hankinson, R. J. (1988) (ed.), \emph{Method, Medicine, and Metaphysics} (Edmonto
 
 Biblatex uses \code{reference} for encyclopaedias and dictionaries, which are typically made up of many small contributions by distinct authors and compiled by an editorial board whose membership might change between successive editions. From a database perspective, reference works are like collections in that they have no single author (a reference work written by a single author should use the \code{book} entry type instead).
 
-\tip{The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} considers the titles of reference works to be more important and memorable than those of the editor, and so lists the title first, but \emph{New Hart's Rules} doesn't. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} takes the former approach, but you can switch to the latter by setting the \texttt{useeditor} option back to true for this type.}
+\tip{The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} considers the titles of reference works to be more important and memorable than those of the editor, and so lists the title first, but \emph{New Hart's Rules} doesn't. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} takes the former approach, but you can switch to the latter by setting the \key{useeditor} option back to true for this type.}
 
 \begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
 \ExecuteBibliographyOptions[reference,mvreference]{useeditor=true}
@@ -1765,7 +1823,7 @@ Bettelheim, B. (1976), \emph{The Uses of Enchantment: The Meaning and Importance
 
 \subsection{Reprints}
 
-\spec{Author (Year/Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{repr.} Location: Publisher).}
+\spec{Author (Year–Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{repr.} Location: Publisher).}
 
 \tip{Use localization key \code{reprint} as the edition. For a revised reprint, use \code{revisedreprint}.}
 
@@ -1805,7 +1863,7 @@ Southern, R. W. (1991), \emph{Saint Anselm: A Portrait in a Landscape} (rev. rep
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\spec{Author (Year/Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{facs. edn.}, Location: Publisher).}
+\spec{Author (Year–Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{facs. edn.}, Location: Publisher).}
 
 \tip{Use localization key \code{facsimile} as the edition.}
 
@@ -2187,6 +2245,13 @@ Dahlhaus, C. (1971), \enquote{Miszellen zur Musiktheorie des 15.\@ Jahrhunderts}
 
 \section{Supplementary works in books and collections}
 
+If the work is headed \enquote{Introduction}, \enquote{Foreword}, \enquote{Afterword}, or similar,
+this is technically a descriptor rather than a title.
+
+\tip{If the work has a true title, the descriptor goes in the \code{note} field.
+  If it doesn't, the descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to correct the formatting.
+  Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
+
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR \S18.2.6*\textdagger>
 {gill1987intro}
@@ -2196,6 +2261,7 @@ Gill, R. (1987), introduction in \emph{The Complete Works of Christopher Marlow}
 @suppbook{gill1987intro,
   author = {Roma Gill},
   title = {introduction},
+  title+an = {=descriptor},
   booktitle = {The Complete Works of Christopher Marlow},
   volume = {1},
   origlocation = {Oxford},
@@ -2205,6 +2271,34 @@ Gill, R. (1987), introduction in \emph{The Complete Works of Christopher Marlow}
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{atwan2000fw}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@suppcollection{atwan2000fw,
+  author = {Robert Atwan},
+  title = {foreword},
+  title+an = {=descriptor},
+  address = {Boston},
+  booktitle = {The Best American Essays of the Century},
+  date = {2000},
+  editor = {Joyce Carol Oates and Robert Atwan},
+  publisher = {Houghton},
+  pages = {x-xvi}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+It is quite rare for such items to have a true title in addition, so previous
+versions of \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} treated all titles of \texttt{suppbook}
+entries as descriptors.
+
+\tip{To restore the previous behaviour, include the following code:}
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppbook]{title}{#1}
+\end{tcblisting}
+
 \chapter{Works presented at meetings}\label{sec:proceedings}
 \chapterprecis{proceedings, mvproceedings, inproceedings, unpublished}
 
@@ -2500,7 +2594,13 @@ CNNR/GMH (Comisión Nacional de Reparación y Reconciliación y Grupo de Memoria
 
 \section{Reports with a type or series}
 
-\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, Series, Number (Location: Institution).}
+\tip{The number of a report will only be printed if you also supply a type or
+  series, or both. The difference between the two is that the series will be
+  separated from the (type and) number by a comma, while only a space
+  separates the type and number. In addition, if you supply a series but no
+  type, the number will be prefixed by `No.\@' or the localized equivalent.}
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, Series, Type Number (Location: Institution).}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2>
 {opcs1979amt}
@@ -2518,8 +2618,6 @@ Office of Population Censuses and Surveys (1979a), \emph{Area Mortality Tables:
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, Type Number (Location: Institution).}
-
 \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2>
 {opcs1979pnc}
 Office of Population Censuses and Surveys (1979b), \emph{Projections of the New Commonwealth and Pakistani Population}, OPCS Monitor PP2 79/1 (London)
@@ -2553,6 +2651,25 @@ Rosenblatt, J., et al. (1988), \emph{The Common Agricultural Policy of the Europ
 \end{bibexbox}
 
 
+\section{Jointly published reports}
+
+It is more common with reports than with books for a work to be branded
+jointly by several issuing organizations. Neither the \emph{Oxford Guide to
+Style} nor \emph{New Hart's Rules} give explicit guidance on this, but I
+suggest handling it by giving corresponding lists as the \code{location}
+and \code{institution}:
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+  location = {Place 1 and Place 2 and Place 3},
+  institution = {Organization 1 and Organization 2 and Organization 3},
+\end{tcblisting}
+
+This will be printed as follows:
+
+\begin{tcolorbox}
+(Place 1: Organization 1, Place 2: Organization 2, and Place 3: Organization 3)
+\end{tcolorbox}
+
 \section{Theses}
 
 \spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, Type (Institution).}
@@ -2572,12 +2689,192 @@ Blackburn, B. J. (1970), \enquote{The Lupus Problem}, Ph.D. diss. (University of
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-The following form is also supported: to use it, pass the \texttt{altthesis} option.
+The following forms are also supported; to use them, pass the \key{thesis} option:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+  \item \key{thesis}\texttt{=}\val{in}\par
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title} (Type, Institution).}
+  \item \key{thesis}\texttt{=}\val{plain}\par
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, Type, Institution.}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Booklets, leaflets, and other formal but unpublished texts}
+
+There are no obvious examples of this kind of material in the \emph{Oxford Guide
+to Style} or \emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{msbh1921fvd}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@booklet{msbh1921fvd,
+  title = {The Facts about Venereal Diseases},
+  date = {1921},
+  howpublished = {distributed by the Missouri State Board of Health, Division of Venereal Diseases},
+  location = {Jefferson City, MO}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{lloyds2015m}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@booklet{lloyds2015m,
+  author = {{Lloyds TSB Bank plc}},
+  title = {Mortgages},
+  date = {2015},
+  howpublished = {obtained in Paisley branch}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Patents}
+
+There are no examples of patents in the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} or
+\emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
+
+Following the conventions from \pkg{biblatex-chicago}, use \texttt{origdate} for
+the date the patent was filed (or the application was published), and
+\texttt{date} for the date the patent was finally issued or published.
+
+\tip{You can override the default date descriptions with the (non-standard)
+\code{origdatetype} and \code{datetype} fields.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{petroff.stapelbroek1980bib}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@patent{petroff.stapelbroek1980bib,
+  author = {Petroff, M.~D. and Stapelbroek, M.~G.},
+  title = {Blocked impurity band detectors},
+  date = {1986-02-04},
+  origdate = {1980-10-23},
+  type = {patentus},
+  number = {4,586,960},
+  location = {Washington, DC},
+  publisher = {U.S. Patent and Trademark Office}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{arduengo.etal2001pmi}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@patent{arduengo.etal2001pmi,
+  author = {Arduengo, III, Anthony J. and Gentry, Jr., Frederick P.
+    and Taverkere,  Prakash~K. and Simmons, III, Howard E.},
+  title = {Process for manufacture of imidazoles},
+  year = {2001},
+  type = {patentus},
+  holder = {{E.~I. DuPont}},
+  number = {6177575}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{pm1981opa}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@patent{pm1981opa,
+  author = {{Phillipp Morris Inc.}},
+  title = {Optical perforating apparatus and system},
+  origdate = {1981-01-07},
+  date = {1985-05-15},
+  type = {patenteu},
+  number = {EP0021165}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{hideki1992qmc}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@patent{hideki1992qmc,
+  author = {U. Hideki},
+  title = {Quadrature Modulation Circuit},
+  type = {patentjp},
+  number = {152932/92},
+  date = {1992-05-20}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Standards}
+
+There are no examples of technical standards in the \emph{Oxford Guide
+to Style} or \emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
+
+The particular quirk with standards entries is that the number is promoted to
+the head of the reference if an author is not specified (or \key{useauthor} is
+\val{false}). If this happens, the number is copied to \code{sortkey} so the
+entry appears in the right place in the reference list, unless you get there
+first with your own value of \code{sortkey}. You may want to do this if, for
+example, you want \enquote{ISO 1000} to come after \enquote{ISO 999}.
+
+\tip{You are encouraged to put the standards body in \code{organization}, but
+  you can use \code{publisher} instead.}
 
-\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, (Type, Institution).}
+\tip{The examples don't demonstrate it, but you can use the \code{version} field
+  for the version of the standard.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{bs5605:1990}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@standard{bs5605:1990,
+  sortyear = {1990},
+  title = {Recommendations for citing and referencing published material},
+  number = {BS~5605:1990},
+  shorthand = {BS5605},
+  organization = {British Standards Institute}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{w3c2017html5.2}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@standard{w3c2017html5.2,
+  title = {{HTML} 5.2},
+  editor = {Steve Faulkner and Arron Eicholz and Travis Leithead and
+    Alex Danilo and Sangwhan Moon},
+  date = {2017-12-14},
+  type = {W3C Recommendation},
+  organization = {World Wide Web Consortium},
+  url = {https://www.w3.org/TR/html52/},
+  urldate = {2018-02-17}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ietf.rfc1155}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@standard{ietf.rfc1155,
+  author = {M. T. Rose and K. McCloghrie},
+  title = {Structure and identification of management information for {TCP/IP}-based internets},
+  date = {1990-05},
+  organization = {Internet Engineering Task Force},
+  series = {Request for Comments},
+  type = {Internet Standard},
+  number = {RFC~1155/STD~16},
+  doi = {10.17487/RFC1155}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
 
 \chapter{Audiovisual materials}\label{sec:audiovideo}
-\chapterprecis{audio, inaudio, image, movie, music, inmusic, video}
+\chapterprecis{artwork, audio, inaudio, image, movie, music, inmusic, performance, video}
 
 There are typically many contributors to an audiovisual work, and the priority given to each role is fluid. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} uses \code{author} for contributors that should go at the head of the reference, and \code{editor} for others. As well as the normal ones you can use the author\slash editor types \code{performer}, \code{conductor}, \code{director} and \code{reader}.
 
@@ -2874,7 +3171,7 @@ Chaplin, C. (1936) (dir.), \emph{Modern Times} (United Artists).
 
 \tip{You can place up to four credits in the editor position, more if any of them correspond to the built-in editor types like \texttt{commentator} or \texttt{translator}.
   If you do supply a lot of credits, the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} recommends you shift them to the end of the reference.
-  You can do this with the \texttt{endeditor} option.}
+  You can do this with the \key{endeditor} option.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <OGS \S15.14.2\textdagger>
@@ -2957,7 +3254,7 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prints all information about the transmission,
 
 \spec{\enquote{EpisodeTitle} (Year), \emph{SeriesTitle}, \lit{Episode} EpisodeNumber, Channel, Day Month.}
 
-\tip{If the episode has a true title, the episide descriptor (e.g. ‘Episode 1’) goes in the \code{note} field.
+\tip{If the episode has a true title, the episide descriptor (e.g. \enquote{Episode 1}) goes in the \code{note} field.
   If it doesn't, the episode descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to remove the quote marks.
   Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the episode descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
 
@@ -3065,9 +3362,14 @@ Yousafzai, M. (2013), \enquote{Making a Wish for Action on Global Education: Mal
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\section{Images}
+\section{Images and works of art}
+
+\tip{If you need the type of image or arrtwork to appear in square brackets,
+  put it in \code{titleaddon}. Otherwise, put it in \code{type}.}
 
-\tip{If desired, use \code{titleaddon} to specify the type of image.}
+\tip{Use \code{institution} (a list) or \code{venue} (a literal) for the
+  organization, museum, gallery or building physically hosting the image, and
+  \code{location} for where it is.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
@@ -3079,12 +3381,14 @@ Clarke, M. (n.d.), \enquote{Exports of Coal to the IFS} [poster], Manchester Art
   author = {M. Clarke},
   title = {Exports of Coal to the IFS},
   titleaddon = {poster},
-  organization = {Manchester Art Gallery},
+  institution = {Manchester Art Gallery},
   url = {http://www.machestergalleries.org/the-collections/search-the-collection/display.php?EMUSESSID=70bd7f1a388d79a82f52ea9aae713ef2&irn=4128},
   urldate = {2013-11-05}}
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\tip{Use \code{organization} for the website or online location of the image.}
+
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
 {ibwNDcgs}
@@ -3093,18 +3397,130 @@ Clarke, M. (n.d.), \enquote{Exports of Coal to the IFS} [poster], Manchester Art
 \begin{Verbatim}
 @image{ibwNDcgs,
   title = {Christ the Good Shepherd},
-  note = {stained glass window, Church of St Erfyl, Llanerfyl, Powys},
+  type = {stained glass window},
+  venue = {Church of St Erfyl},
+  location = {Llanerfyl, Powys},
   organization = {Imaging the Bible in Wales Database},
   url = {http://imagingthebible.llgc.org.uk/object/1884},
   urldate = {2013-11-10}}
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{davinci1480mr}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@artwork{davinci1480mr,
+  author = {given=Leonardo, family=da Vinci},
+  title = {Madonna of the Rocks},
+  type = {oil on canvas},
+  note = {78 x 48.5 in\adddot},
+  year = {1480s},
+  date+an = {=inferred},
+  institution = {Louvre},
+  location = {Paris}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{gormley1998an}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@artwork{gormley1998an,
+  author = {Anthony Gormley},
+  title = {Angel of the {North}},
+  date = {1998},
+  type = {sculpture},
+  location = {Low Fell, Gateshead}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{rodin1882k}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@artwork{rodin1882k,
+  author = {Auguste Rodin},
+  title = {The Kiss},
+  date = {1882},
+  type = {marble},
+  institution = {Musée Rodin},
+  location = {Paris}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Performances}
+
+\tip{Use \code{origdate} for the date when the play, ballet, opera, or whatever
+  was written or premièred, and \code{date} for the date of the performance you
+  are referencing. You can specify what these dates signify with the
+  (non-standard) \code{origdatetype} and \code{datetype} fields. You can also
+  use \code{eventdate} in place of \code{date}, but then you won't be able to
+  specify the type.}
+
+\tip{As for recordings, you can use the \code{author} and \code{editor} fields
+  to provide various credits. As for artworks, use \code{venue} and
+  \code{location} for where the performance occurred, and \code{organization}
+  for a website or organization hosting a recording of the performance online.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ashton1937wb}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@performance{ashton1937wb,
+  author = {Frederick Ashton},
+  origdate = {1937},
+  title = {A Wedding Bouquet},
+  venue = {Royal Opera House},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {2004-10-22}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{lord2007dc}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@performance{lord2007dc,
+  author = {Jon Lord},
+  date = {2007-10-20},
+  title = {Durham Concerto},
+  editor = {{Liverpool Philharmonic Orchestra}},
+  editortype = {performer},
+  editora = {Mischa Damev},
+  editoratype = {conductor},
+  venue = {Durham Cathedral},
+  location = {Durham}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{judge1995mnd}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@performance{judge1995mnd,
+  options = {useauthor=false,useeditor=false},
+  author = {William Shakespeare},
+  title = {A Midsummer Night's Dream},
+  editor = {Ian Judge},
+  editortype = {director},
+  date = {1995-02-26},
+  venue = {Theatre Royal},
+  location = {Newcastle upon Tyne}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
 \chapter{Digital media}\label{sec:electronic}
 \chapterprecis{online, software, dataset}
 
 In Section 18.8.5 of \emph{New Hart's Rules}, some publication dates are printed in parentheses and some are left bare.
-In theory, the difference should be that parentheses indicate ‘proper’ publication (bare dates are when the resource was created or issued). In practice, it seems to be random. I have therefore decided to ignore the variation and leave all such dates in parentheses.
+In theory, the difference should be that parentheses indicate \enquote{proper} publication (bare dates are when the resource was created or issued). In practice, it seems to be random. I have therefore decided to ignore the variation and leave all such dates in parentheses.
 
 \section{Website articles}
 
@@ -3216,14 +3632,14 @@ McEwen, S. (2013), \enquote{Tan Twan Eng Interview: \enquote{I Have No Alternati
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\tip{Unlike standard \textsf{biblatex}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} supports \code{maintitle} for online entries and prints the result in italics. For more portability, you could either hard-code the italics into the \code{organization} field or use the \code{article} entry type.}
+
 \info{It is not made explicit why \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} is in italics and \emph{Wikipedia} is not.
   It might be historical or customary, because \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} was established as a print publication and \emph{Wikipedia} has only been online;
   it might be because \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} is a Latin title;
   it might reflect an opinion on the two resources;
   or it may just be illustrative of variant practice.}
 
-\tip{Unlike standard \textsf{biblatex}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} supports \code{maintitle} for online entries and prints the result in italics. For more portability, you could either hard-code the italics into the \code{organization} field or use the \code{article} entry type.}
-
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
 {wp2013oup}
@@ -3293,7 +3709,7 @@ Shakespeare's Globe (2013), \enquote{On this day in 1611 first production of The
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\tip{If it feels odd putting the entire content of a tweet in your reference, \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using a descriptor like ‘Twitter post’ instead of the title. As described in \cref{sec:broadcasts}, you can do this either by annotating the title field with the keyword \code{descriptor} or by using the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field in place of \code{title}.}
+\tip{If it feels odd putting the entire content of a tweet in your reference, \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using a descriptor like \enquote{Twitter post} instead of the title. As described in \cref{sec:broadcasts}, you can do this either by annotating the title field with the keyword \code{descriptor} or by using the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field in place of \code{title}.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 {oup2015tweet}
@@ -3414,7 +3830,7 @@ Use the \code{jurisdiction} entry type for citing cases.
 
 \tip{Several additional pagination types are defined for use with legal citations:
   \val{article}, \val{clause}, \val{regulation}, and \val{rule} all work as normal.
-  The default is a bare number (\val{none}), indicating a page reference, though EU and ECHR cases default to using the ‘para’ (\val{paragraph}) prefix.
+  The default is a bare number (\val{none}), indicating a page reference, though EU and ECHR cases default to using the \enquote{para} (\val{paragraph}) prefix.
   There is also an alternative pagination type for paragraphs, \val{[]}, which prints the number in square brackets instead of giving it a prefix.
 }
 
@@ -3504,6 +3920,7 @@ Use the \code{jurisdiction} entry type for citing cases.
 \textcite[13]{rvg2004}
 \end{egcite}
 
+
 \tip{If a report is published a long time after the decision, you can put the decision date in \code{origdate} to clarify the situation.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
@@ -3627,7 +4044,7 @@ Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} are inconsiste
   The \key{ecli} option determines under what circumstances the identifier is printed.}
 
 \tip{European cases still get sorted by title, even if the entry begins with the case number.
-  Use \code{sorttitle} if you would rather they were sorted under ‘Case’ or ‘Joined Cases’.}
+  Use \code{sorttitle} if you would rather they were sorted under \enquote{Case} or \enquote{Joined Cases}.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <OGS \S13.4.4>
@@ -3647,7 +4064,7 @@ Case C–118/07 \emph{Commission of the European Communities v Finland} [2002] E
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\tip{Indicate Commission Decisions by putting \code{commission} in the \code{institution} field. If a decision has a formal decision number, put this in the \code{number} field. Put the case number (including the word ‘Case’ if needed) in either the \code{titleaddon}, \code{parvolume}, or \code{userb} field.}
+\tip{Indicate Commission Decisions by putting \code{commission} in the \code{institution} field. If a decision has a formal decision number, put this in the \code{number} field. Put the case number (including the word \enquote{Case} if needed) in either the \code{titleaddon}, \code{parvolume}, or \code{userb} field.}
 
 \tip{An unfortunate side effect of this is that is not possible to use either the parallel or neutral citation idiom to get a reference to look like the following. In such cases, use the \code{note} field to provide the second citation.}
 
@@ -3885,7 +4302,6 @@ Convention Relating to the Status of Refugees (adopted 28 July 1951, entered int
 @legal{refugees,
   entrysubtype = {piltreaty},
   title = {Convention Relating to the Status of Refugees},
-  shorthand = {Refugee Convention},
   execution = {adopted=1951-07-28 and inforce=1954-04-22},
   pagination = {article},
   volume = {189},
@@ -3968,7 +4384,7 @@ Law Commission (2009), \emph{Intoxication and Criminal Liability} (Law Comm No 3
 it provides the \code{commentary} entry type simply as an alias for \code{book}.
 
 \chapter{Specialist materials}\label{sec:special}
-\chapterprecis{misc, unpublished, letter}
+\chapterprecis{misc, unpublished, letter, manuscript}
 
 \section{Poems}\label{sec:poem}
 
@@ -4082,7 +4498,7 @@ Play titles, like those of epic poems, are set in italics rather than quoted.
 
 \section{Manuscripts}\label{sec:ms}
 
-\spec{Author, Title/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.}
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.}
 
 With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can enter manuscripts in either of two ways. The first uses the \code{unpublished} entry type.
 
@@ -4101,7 +4517,7 @@ With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can enter manuscripts in either of two ways. The
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR 18.6.3*\textdagger>
 {smithMS23116}
-Smith, F. [1912–7], travel diaries, British Library, Add. MS 23116.
+Smith, F. (1912–7), travel diaries, British Library, Add. MS 23116.
 \tcblower
 \begin{Verbatim}
 @unpublished{smithMS23116,
@@ -4136,7 +4552,7 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR 18.6.2\textdagger>
 {chaundlerMS288}
-Chaundler, T. [n.d.], \enquote{Collocutiones}, Balliol College, Oxford, MS288.
+Chaundler, T. (n.d.), \enquote{Collocutiones}, Balliol College, Oxford, MS288.
 \tcblower
 \begin{Verbatim}
 @manuscript{chaundlerMS288,
@@ -4151,7 +4567,7 @@ Chaundler, T. [n.d.], \enquote{Collocutiones}, Balliol College, Oxford, MS288.
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR 18.6.2\textdagger>
 {exchequerE311}
-exchequer accounts [1798], Dec., Cheshire Record Office, E311.
+exchequer accounts (1798), Dec., Cheshire Record Office, E311.
 \tcblower
 \begin{Verbatim}
 @manuscript{exchequerE311,
@@ -4165,7 +4581,7 @@ exchequer accounts [1798], Dec., Cheshire Record Office, E311.
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR 18.6.3\textdagger>
 {blcBOX19d}
-Bearsden Ladies' Club minutes [1949], 12 June, Bearsden and Milngavie District Libraries, box 19/d.
+Bearsden Ladies' Club minutes (1949), 12 June, Bearsden and Milngavie District Libraries, box 19/d.
 \tcblower
 \begin{Verbatim}
 @manuscript{blcBOX19d,
@@ -4180,7 +4596,7 @@ Bearsden Ladies' Club minutes [1949], 12 June, Bearsden and Milngavie District L
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR 18.6.5\textdagger>
 {bodMSrawl-d520}
-Bodleian Library [n.d.], Oxford, MS Rawlinson D. 520, fo. 7.
+Bodleian Library (n.d.), Oxford, MS Rawlinson D. 520, fo. 7.
 \tcblower
 \begin{Verbatim}
 @manuscript{bodMSrawl-d520,
@@ -4214,6 +4630,52 @@ Bodleian Library [n.d.], Oxford, MS Rawlinson D. 520, fo. 7.
 \end{bibexbox}
 
 
+\section{Letters}
+
+These examples relate to letters held personally or online. For letters that
+form part of archival collections, see the section on manuscripts above.
+
+Note that it is usually acceptable to exclude personal communications from
+the reference section, and simply cite them in the text (in which case you may
+not need the \pkg{biblatex} machinery).
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}/Descriptor, Date.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.11.1*\textdagger>
+{anon2001pl}
+Personal letter to the author (2001), 2 May.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@letter{anon2001pl,
+  title = {Personal letter to the author},
+  title+an = {=descriptor},
+  date = {2001-05-02}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+In the absence of any explicit rationale governing whether the date is
+parenthetical, in \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} the presence of a URL
+will trigger the use of parentheses.
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}/Descriptor [HowPublished], (Date), OnlineAccess.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.15.3*\textdagger>
+{ritter2001rp}%
+Ritter, R. M. (2001), \enquote{Revised proofs} [email to H. E. Cox], (1 Aug.\@), \url{ogs@ritter.org.uk}, accessed 3 Aug.\@ 2001.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@letter{ritter2001rp,
+  author = {R. M. Ritter},
+  title = {Revised proofs},
+  howpublished = {email to H. E. Cox},
+  date = {2001-08-01},
+  url = {ogs@ritter.org.uk},
+  urldate = {2001-08-03}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
 \printbibliography[notcategory=hidden]
 \end{document}
 %% 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes-doc.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes-doc.pdf
index 94396bbf435..a130b052a5d 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes-doc.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes-doc.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes-doc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes-doc.tex
index ac593a5e19a..f9fef8febd8 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes-doc.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes-doc.tex
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
 %% See:     http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
 %% ----------------------------------------------------------------
 %% 
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
 \ProvidesFile{oxnotes-doc.tex}
     [\Version\space Footnote-based biblatex style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
 \PassOptionsToPackage{style=oxnotes,scnames,varissuedate,anon}{biblatex}
@@ -134,6 +134,15 @@
   {\multicitedelim}
   {\usebibmacro{postnote}\finentrypunct}
 \makeatother
+\DeclareSourcemap{%
+  \maps[datatype=bibtex]{%
+    \map[overwrite=true]{%
+      \pernottype{legslation}
+      \pernottype{legal}
+      \step[fieldset=shorthand, null=true]
+    }%
+  }%
+}
 
 \hypersetup{pdfborder={0 0 0},pdfencoding=auto}
 \usepackage[noabbrev,capitalize,nameinlink]{cleveref}
@@ -258,25 +267,25 @@ The style is self-contained, so you can load it with \pkg{biblatex}:
 
 The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
 
-\begin{docKey}{altthesis}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
-  Puts the thesis type inside, rather than outside, the parenthetical publication block.
-\end{docKey}
-
 \begin{docKey}{anon}{=\val{literal}|\val{long}|\val{short}}{default \val{short}, initially \val{literal}}
   Affects what happens if the author name matches the value of \cs{oxrefanon}.
-  By default, this is ‘Anonymous’, but you could change it a different word (such as ‘Anonimo’) instead.
+  By default, this is \enquote{Anonymous}, but you could change it a different word (such as \enquote{Anonimo}) instead.
   \begin{itemize}
   \item\docValue{literal}
     means no special handling is used.
   \item\docValue{long}
-    will print the unabbreviated localization string \code{anon} (‘Anonymous’) instead of the author name
+    will print the unabbreviated localization string \code{anon} (\enquote{Anonymous}) instead of the author name
     in the bibliography, but neither are printed in citations.
   \item\docValue{short}
-    will print the abbreviated localization string \code{anon} (‘Anon.\@’) instead of the author name
+    will print the abbreviated localization string \code{anon} (\enquote{Anon.\@}) instead of the author name
     in the bibliography, but neither are printed in citations.
   \end{itemize}
 \end{docKey}
 
+\begin{docKey}{bookseries}{=\val{in}|\val{out}}{default \val{in}, initially \val{in}}
+  Puts the series information for a book \docValue{in}side or \docValue{out}side the parenthetical publication block.
+\end{docKey}
+
 \begin{docKey}{court-plain}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
   Prints courts of decision without parentheses.
 \end{docKey}
@@ -301,27 +310,34 @@ The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
   Surrounds URLs with angle brackets.
 \end{docKey}
 
+\begin{docKey}{issuedate-plain}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
+  Removes the parentheses around the date of a periodical without a volume number.
+  This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
+  (This option was previously called \key{varissuedate}.)
+\end{docKey}
+
 \begin{docKey}{issuestyle}{=\val{slash}|\val{colon}|\val{comma}|\val{parens}}{default \val{slash}, initially \val{slash}}
   Affects how journal volumes and numbers are printed.
   \begin{itemize}
   \item\docValue{slash}
-    separates the two with a solidus, e.g. ‘23/2’.
+    separates the two with a solidus, e.g. \enquote{23/2}.
   \item\docValue{colon}
-    separates the two with a colon and space, e.g. ‘23: 2’.
+    separates the two with a colon and space, e.g. \enquote{23: 2}.
   \item\docValue{comma}
-    separates the two with a comma and space, e.g. ‘23, 2’.
+    separates the two with a comma and space, e.g. \enquote{23, 2}.
   \item\docValue{parens}
-    sets off the issue number in parentheses, e.g. ‘23 (2)’.
+    sets off the issue number in parentheses, e.g. \enquote{23 (2)}.
     It is intended for use with \textsf{oxalph}\slash\textsf{oxyear} and not recommended for this style.
   \end{itemize}
 \end{docKey}
 
 
 \begin{docKey}{nolocation}{}{no value, initially unset}
-  Replaces missing locations with ‘n.p.’ or the localized equivalent in books, collections, reference works, proceedings, and similar entry types. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
+  Replaces missing locations with \enquote{n.p.} or the localized equivalent in books, collections, reference works, proceedings, and similar entry types. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
   Alternatively, it may be set on a per-entry basis.
 \end{docKey}
 
+
 \begin{docKey}{nopublisher}{}{no value, initially unset}
   Removes publisher name from all entries. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
 \end{docKey}
@@ -338,6 +354,11 @@ The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
   Prints initial author or editor names in bibliography entries in small capitals.
 \end{docKey}
 
+\begin{docKey}{thesis}{=\val{in}|\val{out}|\val{plain}}{default \val{out}, initially \val{out}}
+  Puts the thesis type \docValue{in}side or \docValue{out}side the parenthetical publication block,
+  while \docValue{plain} removes the parentheses entirely.
+\end{docKey}
+
 \begin{docKey}{timefirst}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
   Prints the time (if provided) before the date instead of after it.
   This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
@@ -349,11 +370,6 @@ The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
   This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
 \end{docKey}
 
-\begin{docKey}{varissuedate}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
-  Removes the parentheses around the date of a periodical without a volume number.
-  This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
-\end{docKey}
-
 \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} makes use of Biber-specific techniques to solve some of the challenges presented by Oxford style.
 It will not stop you from using Bib\TeX\ instead but, if you do, only simple and standard entries will work.
 In particular, manuscripts, legal references and anything involving related entries will be adversely affected.
@@ -390,7 +406,7 @@ Examples that follow standard \textsf{biblatex} semantics, and are therefore
   Code used in bibliography file.
 \end{tcolorbox}
 
-Examples that have been ‘hacked’ in some way, and are therefore not portable
+Examples that have been \enquote{hacked} in some way, and are therefore not portable
 to other styles, are in amber:
 
 \begin{tcolorbox}%
@@ -459,35 +475,17 @@ but by no means all of them will be supported.
 For information on installing the styles, and for the documented source code,
 see the separate documentation file \href{./oxref.pdf}{\texttt{oxref.pdf}}
 
-\section{To do}
+\section{Stability}
 
 The \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} family of styles is currently at \fileversion.
-As mentioned above, what the styles \emph{should} be doing is open to some
-interpretation, so at the moment I am open to the idea of changing how the
-styles handle cases not covered by the two style manuals. Please leave your
-thoughts on the GitHub issue tracker.\footnote{\url{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}}
-At some point version 1.0 will be released, after which the default (expected)
-behaviour of the styles will be fixed, though alternative behaviour may be added.
-
-I do not have any examples to work from for the following entry types, so they
-are currently untested. If you have strong feelings about how they should be
-rendered in Oxford style and can provide me with a sample reference or several,
-I would be most glad to hear from you:
-
-\begin{multicols}{3}
-  \begin{itemize}\firmlist
-    \item suppbook
-    \item booklet
-    \item suppcollection
-    \item patent
-    \item suppperiodical
-    \item artwork
-    \item commentary
-    \item letter
-    \item performance
-    \item standard
-  \end{itemize}
-\end{multicols}
+I have no further features planned, so unless there is popular demand otherwise,
+it should be bug-fix releases only between now and the release of version 1.0.
+When that happens, the default (expected) behaviour of the styles will be frozen,
+meaning I will do my best to avoid backwards-incompatible changes, though
+alternative behaviour may be added. If you spot any aspects of the styles that
+could be improved before then, especially for the cases not covered by the two
+style manuals, please leave your thoughts on the GitHub issue tracker.%
+\footnote{\url{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}}
 
 You are of course encouraged to report any bugs you discover on the
 \href{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}{GitHub issue tracker}
@@ -516,19 +514,19 @@ Test\footcite[49-50]{faith1997epg}
 \end{egcite}
 \addtocategory{hidden}{cobban}
 
-Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} describe an alternative system that uses the abbreviations ‘ibid.\@’, ‘op.\@ cit.\@’, ‘loc.\@ cit.\@’, and ‘id.\@’ and friends, though with underwhelming enthusiasm. If you would like to use these abbreviations, load the \textsf{verbose-trad1} citation scheme instead (and remember to use the \code{gender} field):
+Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} describe an alternative system that uses the abbreviations \enquote{ibid.\@}, \enquote{op.\@ cit.\@}, \enquote{loc.\@ cit.\@}, and \enquote{id.\@} and friends, though with underwhelming enthusiasm. If you would like to use these abbreviations, load the \textsf{verbose-trad1} citation scheme instead (and remember to use the \code{gender} field):
 
 \begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
 \usepackage[bibstyle=oxnotes,citestyle=verbose-trad1]{biblatex}
 \end{tcblisting}
 
 
-\section{Missing and inferred attribution}
+\section{Missing or inferred attribution}
 
 \subsection{Missing attribution}
-Where works have no attribution, both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggest printing them without further adornment in notes, but listing them under ‘Anonymous’ (or ‘Anon.\@’ in the latter case) in the bibliography.
+Where works have no attribution, both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggest printing them without further adornment in notes, but listing them under \enquote{Anonymous} (or \enquote{Anon.\@} in the latter case) in the bibliography.
 
-\tip{\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will not automatically generate anonymous labels for you, but if you use the \key{anon} option (see \cref{sec:loading}), you can transform an author name of ‘Anonymous’ (or whatever \cs{oxrefanon} is set to) in your .bib file to either the long or short localization string \code{anon}.
+\tip{\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will not automatically generate anonymous labels for you, but if you use the \key{anon} option (see \cref{sec:loading}), you can transform an author name of \enquote{Anonymous} (or whatever \cs{oxrefanon} is set to) in your .bib file to either the long or short localization string \code{anon}.
   Doing this will automatically suppress the printing of the anonymous author in notes.
 }
 
@@ -572,8 +570,8 @@ Where works have no attribution, both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph
 
 \subsection{Pseudepigraphy}
 Some older works are known to have been written pseudepigraphically, that is, falsely attributed to a more famous author. The way of indicating this in Oxford style, if desired, is
-to add the prefix ‘Pseudo-’ before the name in notes, and
-to put ‘(Ps.-)’ after the name in the bibliography.
+to add the prefix \enquote{Pseudo-} before the name in notes, and
+to put \enquote{(Ps.-)} after the name in the bibliography.
 
 \tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the name with the keyword \code{pseudo}.
 Since this mechanism is aimed at ancient texts, it has only been designed to work with single-part names
@@ -629,7 +627,7 @@ Oxford style is to give the attribution in square brackets.
 \tip{You can also use the syntax from \textsf{biblatex-realauthor}.
   If you do not specify the \code{author}, then \code{realauthor} is treated as an alias for \code{author} annotated with the keyword \code{inferred}.
   The equivalent is true for \code{realeditor}.
-  Note, however, that \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not recognize the \code{userealauthor} and \code{userealeditor} options.}
+  Note, however, that \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not recognize the \key{userealauthor} and \key{userealeditor} options.}
 
 \subsection{Pseudonyms}
 
@@ -746,7 +744,7 @@ If the contribution of the translators or revisers is so great they could be joi
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\tip{Annotate \emph{either} the \code{editor} \emph{or} \code{translator} field with the keyword \code{jointauthor} to promote the name to the joint author position (you cannot do it for both). Note that you have to supply a suitable \code{shortauthor} value yourself; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not calculate it for you.}
+\tip{Annotate \emph{either} the \code{editor} \emph{or} \code{translator} field with the keyword \code{jointauthor} to promote the name to the joint author position (you cannot do it for both). Internally, what this does is move the names to the \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}-specific \code{jointauthor} field; you can use this and \code{jointauthortype} directly if you like, at the cost of portability to other styles. Note that you have to supply a suitable \code{shortauthor} value yourself; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not calculate it for you.}
 
 \section{Titular prefixes}\label{sec:nametitles}
 
@@ -888,10 +886,10 @@ A. A. Milne, \emph{Pu der Bär} [Ger. trans. of \emph{Winnie the Pooh}] (Potsdam
 
 For periodicals, grey literature, audiovisual and online material, the lack of a place of publication is not surprising; indeed it may be expected. For books, however, it may be remarkable and deserve marking in the bibliography with \enquote{n.p.\@} (for \enquote{no place}).
 
-\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for books, collections, reference works, proceedings and similar entry types, use the \code{nolocation} bibliography option.}
+\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for books, collections, reference works, proceedings and similar entry types, use the \key{nolocation} bibliography option.}
 
-\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for only a specific entry, use the \code{nolocation} entry option instead.
-  This has the feature of hiding the \enquote{n.p.\@} from other styles that do not follow the same convention.}
+\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for only a specific entry, use the \key{nolocation} entry option instead.
+  The advantage of doing this over simply giving \enquote{n.p.\@} as the publisher is that it hides it from other styles that do not follow the same convention.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR \S18.2.9>
@@ -908,12 +906,26 @@ Marchetto of Padua, \emph{Pomerium}, ed. Guiseppe Vecchi (n.p., 1961).
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\section{Missing or inferred date of publication}
+
+If the date is missing from a work, you can sometimes make an educated guess
+what it should be. It is usual practice to enclose such guesses in square
+brackets.
+
+\tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the
+  \code{date}, \code{origdate}, or \code{eventdate} field with the keyword
+  \code{inferred}.}
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+  date+an = {=inferred},
+\end{tcblisting}
+
 \chapter{Articles and periodicals}\label{sec:article}
 \chapterprecis{article, periodical, suppperiodical, review}
 
 \section{Articles in periodicals with volumes/numbers}
 
-The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} consistently prefers volume and part numbers to be written like \enquote{23/2}, but also discusses formats such as \enquote{23: 2} and \enquote{23 (2)}. \emph{New Hart's Rules} adds \enquote{23, 2} as a further possibility. The latter two are better suited to \textsf{oxyear} which uses a colon to demarcate the page numbers. These variations are implemented as the option \textsf{issuestyle}; see \autoref{sec:loading} for details.
+The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} consistently prefers volume and part numbers to be written like \enquote{23/2}, but also discusses formats such as \enquote{23: 2} and \enquote{23 (2)}. \emph{New Hart's Rules} adds \enquote{23, 2} as a further possibility. The latter two are better suited to \textsf{oxalph}\slash\textsf{oxyear} which use a colon to demarcate the page numbers. These variations are implemented as the option \key{issuestyle}; see \autoref{sec:loading} for details.
 
 \spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Year), Pages.}
 
@@ -1207,7 +1219,7 @@ X. Zhentao, K. K. C. Yau, and F. R. Stephenson, \enquote{Astronomical Records on
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\tip{Use \code{bookpagination} to force the display of ‘pp.’ (since the number format is odd), and \cs{DeclareNumChars*}\brackets{S} to ensure that \code{S61} is recognized as a number.}%
+\tip{Use \code{bookpagination} to force the display of \enquote{pp.} (since the number format is odd), and \cs{DeclareNumChars*}\brackets{S} to ensure that \code{S61} is recognized as a number.}%
 
 \section{Articles that span multiple issues}
 
@@ -1233,11 +1245,53 @@ X. Zhentao, K. K. C. Yau, and F. R. Stephenson, \enquote{Astronomical Records on
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\section{Editorials and other regular features}
+
+Strictly speaking, when a work is headed \enquote{Editorial} or \enquote{Letter to the Editor}
+in a periodical, this is a descriptor rather than a title.
+
+\tip{If a piece has a true title, the descriptor goes in the \code{note} field.
+  If it doesn't, the descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to remove the quote marks.
+  Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ball2015ed}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@suppperiodical{ball2015ed,
+  author = {Alexander Ball},
+  title = {Editorial},
+  title+an = {=descriptor},
+  date = {2015},
+  journaltitle = {International Journal of Digital Curation},
+  volume = {10},
+  number = {1},
+  pages = {i-v},
+  doi = {10.2218/ijdc.v10i1.376}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{jccm2006ed}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@suppperiodical{jccm2006ed,
+  title = {\enquote{What a Disaster} and Why Does This Question Matter?},
+  date = {2006},
+  note = {Editorial},
+  journaltitle   = {Journal of Contingencies and Crisis Management},
+  volume = {14},
+  pages = {1-2}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
 \section{Reviews}
 
 \spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{review of} ReviewedWork, \lit{in} \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Year), Pages.}
 
-\tip{To get this format, use a separate entry for the reviewed item, reference it in the ‘related’ field, and use the key ‘reviewof’ as the ‘relatedtype’.}
+\tip{To get this format, use a separate entry for the reviewed item, reference it in the \enquote{related} field, and use the key \enquote{reviewof} as the \enquote{relatedtype}.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <OGS \S15.4.4>
@@ -1402,7 +1456,7 @@ Rosemary Stewart et al. (eds.), \emph{Managing in Britain} (London, 1994).
 
 Biblatex uses \code{reference} for encyclopaedias and dictionaries, which are typically made up of many small contributions by distinct authors and compiled by an editorial board whose membership might change between successive editions. From a database perspective, reference works are like collections in that they have no single author (a reference work written by a single author should use the \code{book} entry type instead).
 
-\tip{The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} considers the titles of reference works to be more important and memorable than those of the editor, and so lists the title first, but \emph{New Hart's Rules} doesn't. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} takes the former approach, but you can switch to the latter by setting the \texttt{useeditor} option back to true for this type.}
+\tip{The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} considers the titles of reference works to be more important and memorable than those of the editor, and so lists the title first, but \emph{New Hart's Rules} doesn't. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} takes the former approach, but you can switch to the latter by setting the \key{useeditor} option back to true for this type.}
 
 \begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
 \ExecuteBibliographyOptions[reference,mvreference]{useeditor=true}
@@ -1764,7 +1818,7 @@ J. D. Denniston, \emph{The Greek Particles} (1934; 2nd edn., Oxford, 1954).
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\tip{Use the localization key \code{revised} as the edition to get ‘revised edition’. Use the localization key \code{revisedenlarged} as the edition to get ‘revised and enlarged edition’}
+\tip{Use the localization key \code{revised} as the edition to get \enquote{revised edition}. Use the localization key \code{revisedenlarged} as the edition to get \enquote{revised and enlarged edition}}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.2.1*>
 {gibbon1686dfs}
@@ -1783,7 +1837,7 @@ J. D. Denniston, \emph{The Greek Particles} (1934; 2nd edn., Oxford, 1954).
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\info{In the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style}, there is no comma after ‘rev. edn.’ in the above reference; this may be an error.}
+\info{In the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style}, there is no comma after \enquote{rev. edn.} in the above reference; this may be an error.}
 
 \subsection{Republications}
 
@@ -1795,7 +1849,7 @@ rather than within the publication block%
 \spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher, Year) (\lit{originally pub.} Year).}
 
 \tip{This format is triggered if you specify an original date but do not specify the original publisher or location, nor the edition of the later publication.}
-\info{In the following example, you will see the style uses ‘originally published’ instead of ‘first published’. This is because ‘originally’ is more common among the available examples.}
+\info{In the following example, you will see the style uses \enquote{originally published} instead of \enquote{first published}. This is because \enquote{originally} is more common among the available examples.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <OGS \S15.2.3>
@@ -2241,6 +2295,13 @@ Carl Dahlhaus, \enquote{Miszellen zur Musiktheorie des 15.\@ Jahrhunderts}, \emp
 
 \section{Supplementary works in books and collections}
 
+If the work is headed \enquote{Introduction}, \enquote{Foreword}, \enquote{Afterword}, or similar,
+this is technically a descriptor rather than a title.
+
+\tip{If the work has a true title, the descriptor goes in the \code{note} field.
+  If it doesn't, the descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to correct the formatting.
+  Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
+
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR \S18.2.6*>
 {gill1987intro}
@@ -2250,6 +2311,7 @@ Roma Gill, introduction in \emph{The Complete Works of Christopher Marlow}, i (O
 @suppbook{gill1987intro,
   author = {Roma Gill},
   title = {introduction},
+  title+an = {=descriptor},
   booktitle = {The Complete Works of Christopher Marlow},
   volume = {1},
   origlocation = {Oxford},
@@ -2259,6 +2321,34 @@ Roma Gill, introduction in \emph{The Complete Works of Christopher Marlow}, i (O
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{atwan2000fw}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@suppcollection{atwan2000fw,
+  author = {Robert Atwan},
+  title = {foreword},
+  title+an = {=descriptor},
+  address = {Boston},
+  booktitle = {The Best American Essays of the Century},
+  date = {2000},
+  editor = {Joyce Carol Oates and Robert Atwan},
+  publisher = {Houghton},
+  pages = {x-xvi}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+It is quite rare for such items to have a true title in addition, so previous
+versions of \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} treated all titles of \texttt{suppbook}
+entries as descriptors.
+
+\tip{To restore the previous behaviour, include the following code:}
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppbook]{title}{#1}
+\end{tcblisting}
+
 \chapter{Works presented at meetings}\label{sec:proceedings}
 \chapterprecis{proceedings, mvproceedings, inproceedings, unpublished}
 
@@ -2542,8 +2632,33 @@ UNESCO, \emph{The United Nations World Water Development Report 4}, vol. 1: \emp
 
 \section{Reports with a type or series}
 
-\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, Series, Number (Location: Institution, Year).}
+\tip{The number of a report will only be printed if you also supply a type or
+  series, or both. The difference between the two is that the series will be
+  separated from the (type and) number by a comma, while only a space
+  separates the type and number. In addition, if you supply a series but no
+  type, the number will be prefixed by `No.\@' or the localized equivalent.}
+
+\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, Series, Type Number (Location: Institution, Year).}
+
+
+\section{Jointly published reports}
 
+It is more common with reports than with books for a work to be branded
+jointly by several issuing organizations. Neither the \emph{Oxford Guide to
+Style} nor \emph{New Hart's Rules} give explicit guidance on this, but I
+suggest handling it by giving corresponding lists as the \code{location}
+and \code{institution}:
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+  location = {Place 1 and Place 2 and Place 3},
+  institution = {Organization 1 and Organization 2 and Organization 3},
+\end{tcblisting}
+
+This will be printed as follows:
+
+\begin{tcolorbox}
+(Place 1: Organization 1, Place 2: Organization 2, and Place 3: Organization 3)
+\end{tcolorbox}
 
 \section{Theses}
 
@@ -2564,12 +2679,191 @@ Bonnie J. Blackburn, \enquote{The Lupus Problem}, Ph.D. diss. (University of Chi
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-The following form is also supported: to use it, pass the \texttt{altthesis} option.
+The following forms are also supported; to use them, pass the \key{thesis} option:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+  \item \key{thesis}\texttt{=}\val{in}\par
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title} (Type, Institution, Year).}
+  \item \key{thesis}\texttt{=}\val{plain}\par
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, Type, Institution, Year.}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Booklets, leaflets, and other formal but unpublished texts}
+
+There are no obvious examples of this kind of material in the \emph{Oxford Guide
+to Style} or \emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{msbh1921fvd}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@booklet{msbh1921fvd,
+  title = {The Facts about Venereal Diseases},
+  date = {1921},
+  howpublished = {distributed by the Missouri State Board of Health, Division of Venereal Diseases},
+  location = {Jefferson City, MO}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{lloyds2015m}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@booklet{lloyds2015m,
+  author = {{Lloyds TSB Bank plc}},
+  title = {Mortgages},
+  date = {2015},
+  howpublished = {obtained in Paisley branch}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Patents}
+
+There are no examples of patents in the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} or
+\emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
+
+Following the conventions from \pkg{biblatex-chicago}, use \texttt{origdate} for
+the date the patent was filed (or the application was published), and
+\texttt{date} for the date the patent was finally issued or published.
+
+\tip{You can override the default date descriptions with the (non-standard)
+\code{origdatetype} and \code{datetype} fields.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{petroff.stapelbroek1980bib}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@patent{petroff.stapelbroek1980bib,
+  author = {Petroff, M.~D. and Stapelbroek, M.~G.},
+  title = {Blocked impurity band detectors},
+  date = {1986-02-04},
+  origdate = {1980-10-23},
+  type = {patentus},
+  number = {4,586,960},
+  location = {Washington, DC},
+  publisher = {U.S. Patent and Trademark Office}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{arduengo.etal2001pmi}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@patent{arduengo.etal2001pmi,
+  author = {Arduengo, III, Anthony J. and Gentry, Jr., Frederick P.
+    and Taverkere,  Prakash~K. and Simmons, III, Howard E.},
+  title = {Process for manufacture of imidazoles},
+  year = {2001},
+  type = {patentus},
+  holder = {{E.~I. DuPont}},
+  number = {6177575}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{pm1981opa}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@patent{pm1981opa,
+  author = {{Phillipp Morris Inc.}},
+  title = {Optical perforating apparatus and system},
+  origdate = {1981-01-07},
+  date = {1985-05-15},
+  type = {patenteu},
+  number = {EP0021165}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{hideki1992qmc}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@patent{hideki1992qmc,
+  author = {U. Hideki},
+  title = {Quadrature Modulation Circuit},
+  type = {patentjp},
+  number = {152932/92},
+  date = {1992-05-20}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Standards}
+
+There are no examples of technical standards in the \emph{Oxford Guide
+to Style} or \emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
+
+The particular quirk with standards entries is that the number is promoted to
+the head of the reference if an author is not specified (or \key{useauthor} is
+\val{false}). If this happens, the number is copied to \code{sortkey} so the
+entry appears in the right place in the reference list, unless you get there
+first with your own value of \code{sortkey}. You may want to do this if, for
+example, you want \enquote{ISO 1000} to come after \enquote{ISO 999}.
+
+\tip{You are encouraged to put the standards body in \code{organization}, but
+  you can use \code{publisher} instead.}
+
+\tip{The examples don't demonstrate it, but you can use the \code{version} field
+  for the version of the standard.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{bs5605:1990}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@standard{bs5605:1990,
+  sortyear = {1990},
+  title = {Recommendations for citing and referencing published material},
+  number = {BS~5605:1990},
+  organization = {British Standards Institute}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{w3c2017html5.2}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@standard{w3c2017html5.2,
+  title = {{HTML} 5.2},
+  editor = {Steve Faulkner and Arron Eicholz and Travis Leithead and
+    Alex Danilo and Sangwhan Moon},
+  date = {2017-12-14},
+  type = {W3C Recommendation},
+  organization = {World Wide Web Consortium},
+  url = {https://www.w3.org/TR/html52/},
+  urldate = {2018-02-17}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
 
-\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, (Type, Institution, Year).}
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ietf.rfc1155}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@standard{ietf.rfc1155,
+  author = {M. T. Rose and K. McCloghrie},
+  title = {Structure and identification of management information for {TCP/IP}-based internets},
+  date = {1990-05},
+  organization = {Internet Engineering Task Force},
+  series = {Request for Comments},
+  type = {Internet Standard},
+  number = {RFC~1155/STD~16},
+  doi = {10.17487/RFC1155}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
 
 \chapter{Audiovisual materials}\label{sec:audiovideo}
-\chapterprecis{audio, inaudio, image, movie, music, inmusic, video}
+\chapterprecis{artwork, audio, inaudio, image, movie, music, inmusic, performance, video}
 
 There are typically many contributors to an audiovisual work, and the priority given to each role is fluid. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} uses \code{author} for contributors that should go at the head of the reference, and \code{editor} for others. As well as the normal ones you can use the author\slash editor types \code{performer}, \code{conductor}, \code{director} and \code{reader}.
 
@@ -2866,7 +3160,7 @@ Charles Chaplin (dir.), \emph{Modern Times} (United Artists, 1936).
 
 \tip{You can place up to four credits in the editor position, more if any of them correspond to the built-in editor types like \texttt{commentator} or \texttt{translator}.
   If you do supply a lot of credits, the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} recommends you shift them to the end of the reference.
-  You can do this with the \texttt{endeditor} option.}
+  You can do this with the \key{endeditor} option.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <OGS \S15.14.2>
@@ -2949,7 +3243,7 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prints all information about the transmission,
 
 \spec{\enquote{EpisodeTitle}, \emph{SeriesTitle}, \lit{Episode} EpisodeNumber, Channel, Date.}
 
-\tip{If the episode has a true title, the episide descriptor (e.g. ‘Episode 1’) goes in the \code{note} field.
+\tip{If the episode has a true title, the episide descriptor (e.g. \enquote{Episode 1}) goes in the \code{note} field.
   If it doesn't, the episode descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to remove the quote marks.
   Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the episode descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
 
@@ -3057,9 +3351,14 @@ Malala Yousafzai, \enquote{Making a Wish for Action on Global Education: Malala
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\section{Images}
+\section{Images and works of art}
 
-\tip{If desired, use \code{titleaddon} to specify the type of image.}
+\tip{If you need the type of image or arrtwork to appear in square brackets,
+  put it in \code{titleaddon}. Otherwise, put it in \code{type}.}
+
+\tip{Use \code{institution} (a list) or \code{venue} (a literal) for the
+  organization, museum, gallery or building physically hosting the image, and
+  \code{location} for where it is.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR \S18.8.5>
@@ -3071,12 +3370,14 @@ M. Clarke, \enquote{Exports of Coal to the IFS} [poster], Manchester Art Gallery
   author = {M. Clarke},
   title = {Exports of Coal to the IFS},
   titleaddon = {poster},
-  organization = {Manchester Art Gallery},
+  institution = {Manchester Art Gallery},
   url = {http://www.machestergalleries.org/the-collections/search-the-collection/display.php?EMUSESSID=70bd7f1a388d79a82f52ea9aae713ef2&irn=4128},
   urldate = {2013-11-05}}
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\tip{Use \code{organization} for the website or online location of the image.}
+
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR \S18.8.5>
 {ibwNDcgs}
@@ -3085,18 +3386,130 @@ M. Clarke, \enquote{Exports of Coal to the IFS} [poster], Manchester Art Gallery
 \begin{Verbatim}
 @image{ibwNDcgs,
   title = {Christ the Good Shepherd},
-  note = {stained glass window, Church of St Erfyl, Llanerfyl, Powys},
+  type = {stained glass window},
+  venue = {Church of St Erfyl},
+  location = {Llanerfyl, Powys},
   organization = {Imaging the Bible in Wales Database},
   url = {http://imagingthebible.llgc.org.uk/object/1884},
   urldate = {2013-11-10}}
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{davinci1480mr}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@artwork{davinci1480mr,
+  author = {given=Leonardo, family=da Vinci},
+  title = {Madonna of the Rocks},
+  type = {oil on canvas},
+  note = {78 x 48.5 in\adddot},
+  year = {1480s},
+  date+an = {=inferred},
+  institution = {Louvre},
+  location = {Paris}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{gormley1998an}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@artwork{gormley1998an,
+  author = {Anthony Gormley},
+  title = {Angel of the {North}},
+  date = {1998},
+  type = {sculpture},
+  location = {Low Fell, Gateshead}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{rodin1882k}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@artwork{rodin1882k,
+  author = {Auguste Rodin},
+  title = {The Kiss},
+  date = {1882},
+  type = {marble},
+  institution = {Musée Rodin},
+  location = {Paris}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Performances}
+
+\tip{Use \code{origdate} for the date when the play, ballet, opera, or whatever
+  was written or premièred, and \code{date} for the date of the performance you
+  are referencing. You can specify what these dates signify with the
+  (non-standard) \code{origdatetype} and \code{datetype} fields. You can also
+  use \code{eventdate} in place of \code{date}, but then you won't be able to
+  specify the type.}
+
+\tip{As for recordings, you can use the \code{author} and \code{editor} fields
+  to provide various credits. As for artworks, use \code{venue} and
+  \code{location} for where the performance occurred, and \code{organization}
+  for a website or organization hosting a recording of the performance online.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ashton1937wb}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@performance{ashton1937wb,
+  author = {Frederick Ashton},
+  origdate = {1937},
+  title = {A Wedding Bouquet},
+  venue = {Royal Opera House},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {2004-10-22}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{lord2007dc}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@performance{lord2007dc,
+  author = {Jon Lord},
+  date = {2007-10-20},
+  title = {Durham Concerto},
+  editor = {{Liverpool Philharmonic Orchestra}},
+  editortype = {performer},
+  editora = {Mischa Damev},
+  editoratype = {conductor},
+  venue = {Durham Cathedral},
+  location = {Durham}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{judge1995mnd}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@performance{judge1995mnd,
+  options = {useauthor=false,useeditor=false},
+  author = {William Shakespeare},
+  title = {A Midsummer Night's Dream},
+  editor = {Ian Judge},
+  editortype = {director},
+  date = {1995-02-26},
+  venue = {Theatre Royal},
+  location = {Newcastle upon Tyne}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
 \chapter{Digital media}\label{sec:electronic}
 \chapterprecis{online, software, dataset}
 
 In Section 18.8.5 of \emph{New Hart's Rules}, some publication dates are printed in parentheses and some are left bare.
-In theory, the difference should be that parentheses indicate ‘proper’ publication (bare dates are when the resource was created or issued). In practice, it seems to be random. I have therefore decided to ignore the variation and leave all such dates in parentheses.
+In theory, the difference should be that parentheses indicate \enquote{proper} publication (bare dates are when the resource was created or issued). In practice, it seems to be random. I have therefore decided to ignore the variation and leave all such dates in parentheses.
 
 \section{Website articles}
 
@@ -3208,14 +3621,14 @@ Stephen McEwen, \enquote{Tan Twan Eng Interview: \enquote{I Have No Alternative
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\tip{Unlike standard \textsf{biblatex}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} supports \code{maintitle} for online entries and prints the result in italics. For more portability, you could either hard-code the italics into the \code{organization} field or use the \code{article} entry type.}
+
 \info{It is not made explicit why \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} is in italics and \emph{Wikipedia} is not.
   It might be historical or customary, because \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} was established as a print publication and \emph{Wikipedia} has only been online;
   it might be because \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} is a Latin title;
   it might reflect an opinion on the two resources;
   or it may just be illustrative of variant practice.}
 
-\tip{Unlike standard \textsf{biblatex}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} supports \code{maintitle} for online entries and prints the result in italics. For more portability, you could either hard-code the italics into the \code{organization} field or use the \code{article} entry type.}
-
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR \S18.8.5>
 {wp2013oup}
@@ -3285,7 +3698,7 @@ Shakespeare's Globe, \enquote{On this day in 1611 first production of The Tempes
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\tip{If it feels odd putting the entire content of a tweet in your reference, \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using a descriptor like ‘Twitter post’ instead of the title. As described in \cref{sec:broadcasts}, you can do this either by annotating the title field with the keyword \code{descriptor} or by using the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field in place of \code{title}.}
+\tip{If it feels odd putting the entire content of a tweet in your reference, \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using a descriptor like \enquote{Twitter post} instead of the title. As described in \cref{sec:broadcasts}, you can do this either by annotating the title field with the keyword \code{descriptor} or by using the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field in place of \code{title}.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 {oup2015tweet}
@@ -3406,7 +3819,7 @@ Use the \code{jurisdiction} entry type for citing cases.
 
 \tip{Several additional pagination types are defined for use with legal citations:
   \val{article}, \val{clause}, \val{regulation}, and \val{rule} all work as normal.
-  The default is a bare number (\val{none}), indicating a page reference, though EU and ECHR cases default to using the ‘para’ (\val{paragraph}) prefix.
+  The default is a bare number (\val{none}), indicating a page reference, though EU and ECHR cases default to using the \enquote{para} (\val{paragraph}) prefix.
   There is also an alternative pagination type for paragraphs, \val{[]}, which prints the number in square brackets instead of giving it a prefix.
 }
 
@@ -3496,6 +3909,7 @@ Use the \code{jurisdiction} entry type for citing cases.
 Test\footcite[13]{rvg2004}
 \end{egcite}
 
+
 \tip{If a report is published a long time after the decision, you can put the decision date in \code{origdate} to clarify the situation.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
@@ -3619,7 +4033,7 @@ Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} are inconsiste
   The \key{ecli} option determines under what circumstances the identifier is printed.}
 
 \tip{European cases still get sorted by title, even if the entry begins with the case number.
-  Use \code{sorttitle} if you would rather they were sorted under ‘Case’ or ‘Joined Cases’.}
+  Use \code{sorttitle} if you would rather they were sorted under \enquote{Case} or \enquote{Joined Cases}.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <OGS \S13.4.4>
@@ -3639,7 +4053,7 @@ Case C–118/07 \emph{Commission of the European Communities v Finland} [2002] E
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\tip{Indicate Commission Decisions by putting \code{commission} in the \code{institution} field. If a decision has a formal decision number, put this in the \code{number} field. Put the case number (including the word ‘Case’ if needed) in either the \code{titleaddon}, \code{parvolume}, or \code{userb} field.}
+\tip{Indicate Commission Decisions by putting \code{commission} in the \code{institution} field. If a decision has a formal decision number, put this in the \code{number} field. Put the case number (including the word \enquote{Case} if needed) in either the \code{titleaddon}, \code{parvolume}, or \code{userb} field.}
 
 \tip{An unfortunate side effect of this is that is not possible to use either the parallel or neutral citation idiom to get a reference to look like the following. In such cases, use the \code{note} field to provide the second citation.}
 
@@ -3961,7 +4375,7 @@ Law Commission, \emph{Intoxication and Criminal Liability} (Law Comm No 314, Cm
 it provides the \code{commentary} entry type simply as an alias for \code{book}.
 
 \chapter{Specialist materials}\label{sec:special}
-\chapterprecis{misc, unpublished, letter}
+\chapterprecis{misc, unpublished, letter, manuscript}
 
 \section{Poems}\label{sec:poem}
 
@@ -4075,7 +4489,7 @@ Play titles, like those of epic poems, are set in italics rather than quoted.
 
 \section{Manuscripts}\label{sec:ms}
 
-\spec{Author, Title/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.}
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.}
 
 With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can enter manuscripts in either of two ways. The first uses the \code{unpublished} entry type.
 
@@ -4207,6 +4621,52 @@ Bodleian Library, Oxford, MS Rawlinson D. 520, fo. 7.
 \end{bibexbox}
 
 
+\section{Letters}
+
+These examples relate to letters held personally or online. For letters that
+form part of archival collections, see the section on manuscripts above.
+
+Note that it is usually acceptable to exclude personal communications from
+the reference section, and simply cite them in the text (in which case you may
+not need the \pkg{biblatex} machinery).
+
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}/Descriptor, Date.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.11.1*>
+{anon2001pl}
+Personal letter to the author, 2 May 2001.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@letter{anon2001pl,
+  title = {Personal letter to the author},
+  title+an = {=descriptor},
+  date = {2001-05-02}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+In the absence of any explicit rationale governing whether the date is
+parenthetical, in \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} the presence of a URL
+will trigger the use of parentheses.
+
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}/Descriptor [HowPublished], (Date), OnlineAccess.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.15.3*>
+{ritter2001rp}%
+R. M. Ritter, \enquote{Revised proofs} [email to H. E. Cox], (1 Aug.\@ 2001), \url{ogs@ritter.org.uk}, accessed 3 Aug.\@ 2001.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@letter{ritter2001rp,
+  author = {R. M. Ritter},
+  title = {Revised proofs},
+  howpublished = {email to H. E. Cox},
+  date = {2001-08-01},
+  url = {ogs@ritter.org.uk},
+  urldate = {2001-08-03}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
 \printbibliography[notcategory=hidden]
 \end{document}
 %% 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum-doc.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum-doc.pdf
index efbe8ed1412..e2b72ae9c7d 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum-doc.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum-doc.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum-doc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum-doc.tex
index e91ad8319f9..88008082e76 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum-doc.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum-doc.tex
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
 %% See:     http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
 %% ----------------------------------------------------------------
 %% 
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
 \ProvidesFile{oxnum-doc.tex}
     [\Version\space Numeric biblatex style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
 \PassOptionsToPackage{style=oxnum,scnames,varissuedate,anon}{biblatex}
@@ -265,25 +265,25 @@ The style is self-contained, so you can load it with \pkg{biblatex}:
 
 The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
 
-\begin{docKey}{altthesis}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
-  Puts the thesis type inside, rather than outside, the parenthetical publication block.
-\end{docKey}
-
 \begin{docKey}{anon}{=\val{literal}|\val{long}|\val{short}}{default \val{short}, initially \val{literal}}
   Affects what happens if the author name matches the value of \cs{oxrefanon}.
-  By default, this is ‘Anonymous’, but you could change it a different word (such as ‘Anonimo’) instead.
+  By default, this is \enquote{Anonymous}, but you could change it a different word (such as \enquote{Anonimo}) instead.
   \begin{itemize}
   \item\docValue{literal}
     means no special handling is used.
   \item\docValue{long}
-    will print the unabbreviated localization string \code{anon} (‘Anonymous’) instead of the author name
+    will print the unabbreviated localization string \code{anon} (\enquote{Anonymous}) instead of the author name
     in the bibliography.
   \item\docValue{short}
-    will print the abbreviated localization string \code{anon} (‘Anon.\@’) instead of the author name
+    will print the abbreviated localization string \code{anon} (\enquote{Anon.\@}) instead of the author name
     in the bibliography.
   \end{itemize}
 \end{docKey}
 
+\begin{docKey}{bookseries}{=\val{in}|\val{out}}{default \val{in}, initially \val{in}}
+  Puts the series information for a book \docValue{in}side or \docValue{out}side the parenthetical publication block.
+\end{docKey}
+
 \begin{docKey}{court-plain}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
   Prints courts of decision without parentheses.
 \end{docKey}
@@ -308,27 +308,34 @@ The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
   Surrounds URLs with angle brackets.
 \end{docKey}
 
+\begin{docKey}{issuedate-plain}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
+  Removes the parentheses around the date of a periodical without a volume number.
+  This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
+  (This option was previously called \key{varissuedate}.)
+\end{docKey}
+
 \begin{docKey}{issuestyle}{=\val{slash}|\val{colon}|\val{comma}|\val{parens}}{default \val{slash}, initially \val{slash}}
   Affects how journal volumes and numbers are printed.
   \begin{itemize}
   \item\docValue{slash}
-    separates the two with a solidus, e.g. ‘23/2’.
+    separates the two with a solidus, e.g. \enquote{23/2}.
   \item\docValue{colon}
-    separates the two with a colon and space, e.g. ‘23: 2’.
+    separates the two with a colon and space, e.g. \enquote{23: 2}.
   \item\docValue{comma}
-    separates the two with a comma and space, e.g. ‘23, 2’.
+    separates the two with a comma and space, e.g. \enquote{23, 2}.
   \item\docValue{parens}
-    sets off the issue number in parentheses, e.g. ‘23 (2)’.
+    sets off the issue number in parentheses, e.g. \enquote{23 (2)}.
     It is intended for use with \textsf{oxalph}\slash\textsf{oxyear} and not recommended for this style.
   \end{itemize}
 \end{docKey}
 
 
 \begin{docKey}{nolocation}{}{no value, initially unset}
-  Replaces missing locations with ‘n.p.’ or the localized equivalent in books, collections, reference works, proceedings, and similar entry types. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
+  Replaces missing locations with \enquote{n.p.} or the localized equivalent in books, collections, reference works, proceedings, and similar entry types. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
   Alternatively, it may be set on a per-entry basis.
 \end{docKey}
 
+
 \begin{docKey}{nopublisher}{}{no value, initially unset}
   Removes publisher name from all entries. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
 \end{docKey}
@@ -345,6 +352,11 @@ The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
   Prints initial author or editor names in bibliography entries in small capitals.
 \end{docKey}
 
+\begin{docKey}{thesis}{=\val{in}|\val{out}|\val{plain}}{default \val{out}, initially \val{out}}
+  Puts the thesis type \docValue{in}side or \docValue{out}side the parenthetical publication block,
+  while \docValue{plain} removes the parentheses entirely.
+\end{docKey}
+
 \begin{docKey}{timefirst}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
   Prints the time (if provided) before the date instead of after it.
   This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
@@ -356,11 +368,6 @@ The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
   This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
 \end{docKey}
 
-\begin{docKey}{varissuedate}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
-  Removes the parentheses around the date of a periodical without a volume number.
-  This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
-\end{docKey}
-
 \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} makes use of Biber-specific techniques to solve some of the challenges presented by Oxford style.
 It will not stop you from using Bib\TeX\ instead but, if you do, only simple and standard entries will work.
 In particular, manuscripts, legal references and anything involving related entries will be adversely affected.
@@ -397,7 +404,7 @@ Examples that follow standard \textsf{biblatex} semantics, and are therefore
   Code used in bibliography file.
 \end{tcolorbox}
 
-Examples that have been ‘hacked’ in some way, and are therefore not portable
+Examples that have been \enquote{hacked} in some way, and are therefore not portable
 to other styles, are in amber:
 
 \begin{tcolorbox}%
@@ -466,35 +473,17 @@ but by no means all of them will be supported.
 For information on installing the styles, and for the documented source code,
 see the separate documentation file \href{./oxref.pdf}{\texttt{oxref.pdf}}
 
-\section{To do}
+\section{Stability}
 
 The \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} family of styles is currently at \fileversion.
-As mentioned above, what the styles \emph{should} be doing is open to some
-interpretation, so at the moment I am open to the idea of changing how the
-styles handle cases not covered by the two style manuals. Please leave your
-thoughts on the GitHub issue tracker.\footnote{\url{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}}
-At some point version 1.0 will be released, after which the default (expected)
-behaviour of the styles will be fixed, though alternative behaviour may be added.
-
-I do not have any examples to work from for the following entry types, so they
-are currently untested. If you have strong feelings about how they should be
-rendered in Oxford style and can provide me with a sample reference or several,
-I would be most glad to hear from you:
-
-\begin{multicols}{3}
-  \begin{itemize}\firmlist
-    \item suppbook
-    \item booklet
-    \item suppcollection
-    \item patent
-    \item suppperiodical
-    \item artwork
-    \item commentary
-    \item letter
-    \item performance
-    \item standard
-  \end{itemize}
-\end{multicols}
+I have no further features planned, so unless there is popular demand otherwise,
+it should be bug-fix releases only between now and the release of version 1.0.
+When that happens, the default (expected) behaviour of the styles will be frozen,
+meaning I will do my best to avoid backwards-incompatible changes, though
+alternative behaviour may be added. If you spot any aspects of the styles that
+could be improved before then, especially for the cases not covered by the two
+style manuals, please leave your thoughts on the GitHub issue tracker.%
+\footnote{\url{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}}
 
 You are of course encouraged to report any bugs you discover on the
 \href{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}{GitHub issue tracker}
@@ -509,17 +498,18 @@ and indeed loads a tweaked version of a standard \textsf{biblatex} one.
 
 Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} describe a system that uses simple numbers as citation labels, almost as if they were endnotes. This system does not support page references, unlike the citation labels familiar to \LaTeX\ users. In the absence of a better idea, therefore, this style treats citation labels rather like author–year parenthetical citations and adopts the conventions from \textsf{oxyear}. Pages are set off with a colon, and multiple works are separated with a semicolon.
 
-\begin{egcite}{}
+\begin{egcite}%
+{Test [\citefield{hankinson1988mmm}{labelnumber}: 93, 96; \citefield{hankinson1989gba}{labelnumber}: 72]}
 Test \parencites%
   [93, 96]{hankinson1988mmm}%
   [72]{hankinson1989gba}
 \end{egcite}
 
-\section{Missing and inferred attribution}
+\section{Missing or inferred attribution}
 
 \subsection{Missing attribution}
 
-\tip{\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will not automatically generate anonymous labels for you, but if you use the \key{anon} option (see \cref{sec:loading}), you can transform an author name of ‘Anonymous’ (or whatever \cs{oxrefanon} is set to) in your .bib file to either the long or short localization string \code{anon}.
+\tip{\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will not automatically generate anonymous labels for you, but if you use the \key{anon} option (see \cref{sec:loading}), you can transform an author name of \enquote{Anonymous} (or whatever \cs{oxrefanon} is set to) in your .bib file to either the long or short localization string \code{anon}.
 }
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
@@ -561,7 +551,7 @@ Test \parencites%
 
 \subsection{Pseudepigraphy}
 Some older works are known to have been written pseudepigraphically, that is, falsely attributed to a more famous author. The way of indicating this in Oxford style, if desired, is
-to put ‘(Ps.-)’ after the name in the bibliography.
+to put \enquote{(Ps.-)} after the name in the bibliography.
 
 \tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the name with the keyword \code{pseudo}.
 }
@@ -615,7 +605,7 @@ Oxford style is to give the attribution in square brackets.
 \tip{You can also use the syntax from \textsf{biblatex-realauthor}.
   If you do not specify the \code{author}, then \code{realauthor} is treated as an alias for \code{author} annotated with the keyword \code{inferred}.
   The equivalent is true for \code{realeditor}.
-  Note, however, that \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not recognize the \code{userealauthor} and \code{userealeditor} options.}
+  Note, however, that \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not recognize the \key{userealauthor} and \key{userealeditor} options.}
 
 \subsection{Pseudonyms}
 
@@ -731,7 +721,7 @@ If the contribution of the translators or revisers is so great they could be joi
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\tip{Annotate \emph{either} the \code{editor} \emph{or} \code{translator} field with the keyword \code{jointauthor} to promote the name to the joint author position (you cannot do it for both). Note that you have to supply a suitable \code{shortauthor} value yourself; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not calculate it for you.}
+\tip{Annotate \emph{either} the \code{editor} \emph{or} \code{translator} field with the keyword \code{jointauthor} to promote the name to the joint author position (you cannot do it for both). Internally, what this does is move the names to the \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}-specific \code{jointauthor} field; you can use this and \code{jointauthortype} directly if you like, at the cost of portability to other styles. Note that you have to supply a suitable \code{shortauthor} value yourself; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not calculate it for you.}
 
 \section{Titular prefixes}\label{sec:nametitles}
 
@@ -873,10 +863,10 @@ A. A. Milne, \emph{Pu der Bär} [Ger. trans. of \emph{Winnie the Pooh}] (Potsdam
 
 For periodicals, grey literature, audiovisual and online material, the lack of a place of publication is not surprising; indeed it may be expected. For books, however, it may be remarkable and deserve marking in the bibliography with \enquote{n.p.\@} (for \enquote{no place}).
 
-\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for books, collections, reference works, proceedings and similar entry types, use the \code{nolocation} bibliography option.}
+\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for books, collections, reference works, proceedings and similar entry types, use the \key{nolocation} bibliography option.}
 
-\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for only a specific entry, use the \code{nolocation} entry option instead.
-  This has the feature of hiding the \enquote{n.p.\@} from other styles that do not follow the same convention.}
+\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for only a specific entry, use the \key{nolocation} entry option instead.
+  The advantage of doing this over simply giving \enquote{n.p.\@} as the publisher is that it hides it from other styles that do not follow the same convention.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR \S18.2.9>
@@ -893,12 +883,26 @@ Marchetto of Padua, \emph{Pomerium}, ed. Guiseppe Vecchi (n.p., 1961).
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\section{Missing or inferred date of publication}
+
+If the date is missing from a work, you can sometimes make an educated guess
+what it should be. It is usual practice to enclose such guesses in square
+brackets.
+
+\tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the
+  \code{date}, \code{origdate}, or \code{eventdate} field with the keyword
+  \code{inferred}.}
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+  date+an = {=inferred},
+\end{tcblisting}
+
 \chapter{Articles and periodicals}\label{sec:article}
 \chapterprecis{article, periodical, suppperiodical, review}
 
 \section{Articles in periodicals with volumes/numbers}
 
-The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} consistently prefers volume and part numbers to be written like \enquote{23/2}, but also discusses formats such as \enquote{23: 2} and \enquote{23 (2)}. \emph{New Hart's Rules} adds \enquote{23, 2} as a further possibility. The latter two are better suited to \textsf{oxyear} which uses a colon to demarcate the page numbers. These variations are implemented as the option \textsf{issuestyle}; see \autoref{sec:loading} for details.
+The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} consistently prefers volume and part numbers to be written like \enquote{23/2}, but also discusses formats such as \enquote{23: 2} and \enquote{23 (2)}. \emph{New Hart's Rules} adds \enquote{23, 2} as a further possibility. The latter two are better suited to \textsf{oxalph}\slash\textsf{oxyear} which use a colon to demarcate the page numbers. These variations are implemented as the option \key{issuestyle}; see \autoref{sec:loading} for details.
 
 \spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Year), Pages.}
 
@@ -971,7 +975,9 @@ A. Druin, \enquote{The Role of Children in the Design of New Technology}, \emph{
 \end{bibexbox}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}(hacked)
+<NHR \S18.8.5*>
 {li.etal2013flh}
+Shu Li et al., \enquote{Forever Love: The Hitherto Earliest Record of Copulating Insects from the Middle Jurassic of China}, \emph{PLoS ONE}, 8/11 (2013), e78188. doi: \path{10.1371/journal.pone.0078188}
 \tcblower
 \begin{Verbatim}
 @article{li.etal2013flh,
@@ -1190,7 +1196,7 @@ X. Zhentao, K. K. C. Yau, and F. R. Stephenson, \enquote{Astronomical Records on
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\tip{Use \code{bookpagination} to force the display of ‘pp.’ (since the number format is odd), and \cs{DeclareNumChars*}\brackets{S} to ensure that \code{S61} is recognized as a number.}%
+\tip{Use \code{bookpagination} to force the display of \enquote{pp.} (since the number format is odd), and \cs{DeclareNumChars*}\brackets{S} to ensure that \code{S61} is recognized as a number.}%
 
 \section{Articles that span multiple issues}
 
@@ -1216,11 +1222,53 @@ X. Zhentao, K. K. C. Yau, and F. R. Stephenson, \enquote{Astronomical Records on
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\section{Editorials and other regular features}
+
+Strictly speaking, when a work is headed \enquote{Editorial} or \enquote{Letter to the Editor}
+in a periodical, this is a descriptor rather than a title.
+
+\tip{If a piece has a true title, the descriptor goes in the \code{note} field.
+  If it doesn't, the descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to remove the quote marks.
+  Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ball2015ed}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@suppperiodical{ball2015ed,
+  author = {Alexander Ball},
+  title = {Editorial},
+  title+an = {=descriptor},
+  date = {2015},
+  journaltitle = {International Journal of Digital Curation},
+  volume = {10},
+  number = {1},
+  pages = {i-v},
+  doi = {10.2218/ijdc.v10i1.376}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{jccm2006ed}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@suppperiodical{jccm2006ed,
+  title = {\enquote{What a Disaster} and Why Does This Question Matter?},
+  date = {2006},
+  note = {Editorial},
+  journaltitle   = {Journal of Contingencies and Crisis Management},
+  volume = {14},
+  pages = {1-2}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
 \section{Reviews}
 
 \spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{review of} ReviewedWork, \lit{in} \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Year), Pages.}
 
-\tip{To get this format, use a separate entry for the reviewed item, reference it in the ‘related’ field, and use the key ‘reviewof’ as the ‘relatedtype’.}
+\tip{To get this format, use a separate entry for the reviewed item, reference it in the \enquote{related} field, and use the key \enquote{reviewof} as the \enquote{relatedtype}.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <OGS \S15.4.4>
@@ -1385,7 +1433,7 @@ Rosemary Stewart et al. (eds.), \emph{Managing in Britain} (London, 1994).
 
 Biblatex uses \code{reference} for encyclopaedias and dictionaries, which are typically made up of many small contributions by distinct authors and compiled by an editorial board whose membership might change between successive editions. From a database perspective, reference works are like collections in that they have no single author (a reference work written by a single author should use the \code{book} entry type instead).
 
-\tip{The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} considers the titles of reference works to be more important and memorable than those of the editor, and so lists the title first, but \emph{New Hart's Rules} doesn't. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} takes the former approach, but you can switch to the latter by setting the \texttt{useeditor} option back to true for this type.}
+\tip{The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} considers the titles of reference works to be more important and memorable than those of the editor, and so lists the title first, but \emph{New Hart's Rules} doesn't. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} takes the former approach, but you can switch to the latter by setting the \key{useeditor} option back to true for this type.}
 
 \begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
 \ExecuteBibliographyOptions[reference,mvreference]{useeditor=true}
@@ -1745,7 +1793,7 @@ J. D. Denniston, \emph{The Greek Particles} (1934; 2nd edn., Oxford, 1954).
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\tip{Use the localization key \code{revised} as the edition to get ‘revised edition’. Use the localization key \code{revisedenlarged} as the edition to get ‘revised and enlarged edition’}
+\tip{Use the localization key \code{revised} as the edition to get \enquote{revised edition}. Use the localization key \code{revisedenlarged} as the edition to get \enquote{revised and enlarged edition}}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.2.1*>
 {gibbon1686dfs}
@@ -1764,7 +1812,7 @@ J. D. Denniston, \emph{The Greek Particles} (1934; 2nd edn., Oxford, 1954).
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\info{In the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style}, there is no comma after ‘rev. edn.’ in the above reference; this may be an error.}
+\info{In the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style}, there is no comma after \enquote{rev. edn.} in the above reference; this may be an error.}
 
 \subsection{Republications}
 
@@ -1776,7 +1824,7 @@ rather than within the publication block%
 \spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher, Year) (\lit{originally pub.} Year).}
 
 \tip{This format is triggered if you specify an original date but do not specify the original publisher or location, nor the edition of the later publication.}
-\info{In the following example, you will see the style uses ‘originally published’ instead of ‘first published’. This is because ‘originally’ is more common among the available examples.}
+\info{In the following example, you will see the style uses \enquote{originally published} instead of \enquote{first published}. This is because \enquote{originally} is more common among the available examples.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <OGS \S15.2.3>
@@ -2193,6 +2241,13 @@ Carl Dahlhaus, \enquote{Miszellen zur Musiktheorie des 15.\@ Jahrhunderts}, \emp
 
 \section{Supplementary works in books and collections}
 
+If the work is headed \enquote{Introduction}, \enquote{Foreword}, \enquote{Afterword}, or similar,
+this is technically a descriptor rather than a title.
+
+\tip{If the work has a true title, the descriptor goes in the \code{note} field.
+  If it doesn't, the descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to correct the formatting.
+  Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
+
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR \S18.2.6*>
 {gill1987intro}
@@ -2202,6 +2257,7 @@ Roma Gill, introduction in \emph{The Complete Works of Christopher Marlow}, i (O
 @suppbook{gill1987intro,
   author = {Roma Gill},
   title = {introduction},
+  title+an = {=descriptor},
   booktitle = {The Complete Works of Christopher Marlow},
   volume = {1},
   origlocation = {Oxford},
@@ -2211,6 +2267,34 @@ Roma Gill, introduction in \emph{The Complete Works of Christopher Marlow}, i (O
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{atwan2000fw}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@suppcollection{atwan2000fw,
+  author = {Robert Atwan},
+  title = {foreword},
+  title+an = {=descriptor},
+  address = {Boston},
+  booktitle = {The Best American Essays of the Century},
+  date = {2000},
+  editor = {Joyce Carol Oates and Robert Atwan},
+  publisher = {Houghton},
+  pages = {x-xvi}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+It is quite rare for such items to have a true title in addition, so previous
+versions of \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} treated all titles of \texttt{suppbook}
+entries as descriptors.
+
+\tip{To restore the previous behaviour, include the following code:}
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppbook]{title}{#1}
+\end{tcblisting}
+
 \chapter{Works presented at meetings}\label{sec:proceedings}
 \chapterprecis{proceedings, mvproceedings, inproceedings, unpublished}
 
@@ -2494,8 +2578,33 @@ UNESCO, \emph{The United Nations World Water Development Report 4}, vol. 1: \emp
 
 \section{Reports with a type or series}
 
-\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, Series, Number (Location: Institution, Year).}
+\tip{The number of a report will only be printed if you also supply a type or
+  series, or both. The difference between the two is that the series will be
+  separated from the (type and) number by a comma, while only a space
+  separates the type and number. In addition, if you supply a series but no
+  type, the number will be prefixed by `No.\@' or the localized equivalent.}
+
+\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, Series, Type Number (Location: Institution, Year).}
+
+
+\section{Jointly published reports}
 
+It is more common with reports than with books for a work to be branded
+jointly by several issuing organizations. Neither the \emph{Oxford Guide to
+Style} nor \emph{New Hart's Rules} give explicit guidance on this, but I
+suggest handling it by giving corresponding lists as the \code{location}
+and \code{institution}:
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+  location = {Place 1 and Place 2 and Place 3},
+  institution = {Organization 1 and Organization 2 and Organization 3},
+\end{tcblisting}
+
+This will be printed as follows:
+
+\begin{tcolorbox}
+(Place 1: Organization 1, Place 2: Organization 2, and Place 3: Organization 3)
+\end{tcolorbox}
 
 \section{Theses}
 
@@ -2516,12 +2625,191 @@ Bonnie J. Blackburn, \enquote{The Lupus Problem}, Ph.D. diss. (University of Chi
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-The following form is also supported: to use it, pass the \texttt{altthesis} option.
+The following forms are also supported; to use them, pass the \key{thesis} option:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+  \item \key{thesis}\texttt{=}\val{in}\par
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title} (Type, Institution, Year).}
+  \item \key{thesis}\texttt{=}\val{plain}\par
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, Type, Institution, Year.}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Booklets, leaflets, and other formal but unpublished texts}
+
+There are no obvious examples of this kind of material in the \emph{Oxford Guide
+to Style} or \emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{msbh1921fvd}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@booklet{msbh1921fvd,
+  title = {The Facts about Venereal Diseases},
+  date = {1921},
+  howpublished = {distributed by the Missouri State Board of Health, Division of Venereal Diseases},
+  location = {Jefferson City, MO}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{lloyds2015m}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@booklet{lloyds2015m,
+  author = {{Lloyds TSB Bank plc}},
+  title = {Mortgages},
+  date = {2015},
+  howpublished = {obtained in Paisley branch}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Patents}
+
+There are no examples of patents in the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} or
+\emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
+
+Following the conventions from \pkg{biblatex-chicago}, use \texttt{origdate} for
+the date the patent was filed (or the application was published), and
+\texttt{date} for the date the patent was finally issued or published.
+
+\tip{You can override the default date descriptions with the (non-standard)
+\code{origdatetype} and \code{datetype} fields.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{petroff.stapelbroek1980bib}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@patent{petroff.stapelbroek1980bib,
+  author = {Petroff, M.~D. and Stapelbroek, M.~G.},
+  title = {Blocked impurity band detectors},
+  date = {1986-02-04},
+  origdate = {1980-10-23},
+  type = {patentus},
+  number = {4,586,960},
+  location = {Washington, DC},
+  publisher = {U.S. Patent and Trademark Office}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{arduengo.etal2001pmi}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@patent{arduengo.etal2001pmi,
+  author = {Arduengo, III, Anthony J. and Gentry, Jr., Frederick P.
+    and Taverkere,  Prakash~K. and Simmons, III, Howard E.},
+  title = {Process for manufacture of imidazoles},
+  year = {2001},
+  type = {patentus},
+  holder = {{E.~I. DuPont}},
+  number = {6177575}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{pm1981opa}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@patent{pm1981opa,
+  author = {{Phillipp Morris Inc.}},
+  title = {Optical perforating apparatus and system},
+  origdate = {1981-01-07},
+  date = {1985-05-15},
+  type = {patenteu},
+  number = {EP0021165}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{hideki1992qmc}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@patent{hideki1992qmc,
+  author = {U. Hideki},
+  title = {Quadrature Modulation Circuit},
+  type = {patentjp},
+  number = {152932/92},
+  date = {1992-05-20}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Standards}
+
+There are no examples of technical standards in the \emph{Oxford Guide
+to Style} or \emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
+
+The particular quirk with standards entries is that the number is promoted to
+the head of the reference if an author is not specified (or \key{useauthor} is
+\val{false}). If this happens, the number is copied to \code{sortkey} so the
+entry appears in the right place in the reference list, unless you get there
+first with your own value of \code{sortkey}. You may want to do this if, for
+example, you want \enquote{ISO 1000} to come after \enquote{ISO 999}.
+
+\tip{You are encouraged to put the standards body in \code{organization}, but
+  you can use \code{publisher} instead.}
+
+\tip{The examples don't demonstrate it, but you can use the \code{version} field
+  for the version of the standard.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{bs5605:1990}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@standard{bs5605:1990,
+  sortyear = {1990},
+  title = {Recommendations for citing and referencing published material},
+  number = {BS~5605:1990},
+  organization = {British Standards Institute}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{w3c2017html5.2}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@standard{w3c2017html5.2,
+  title = {{HTML} 5.2},
+  editor = {Steve Faulkner and Arron Eicholz and Travis Leithead and
+    Alex Danilo and Sangwhan Moon},
+  date = {2017-12-14},
+  type = {W3C Recommendation},
+  organization = {World Wide Web Consortium},
+  url = {https://www.w3.org/TR/html52/},
+  urldate = {2018-02-17}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
 
-\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, (Type, Institution, Year).}
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ietf.rfc1155}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@standard{ietf.rfc1155,
+  author = {M. T. Rose and K. McCloghrie},
+  title = {Structure and identification of management information for {TCP/IP}-based internets},
+  date = {1990-05},
+  organization = {Internet Engineering Task Force},
+  series = {Request for Comments},
+  type = {Internet Standard},
+  number = {RFC~1155/STD~16},
+  doi = {10.17487/RFC1155}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
 
 \chapter{Audiovisual materials}\label{sec:audiovideo}
-\chapterprecis{audio, inaudio, image, movie, music, inmusic, video}
+\chapterprecis{artwork, audio, inaudio, image, movie, music, inmusic, performance, video}
 
 There are typically many contributors to an audiovisual work, and the priority given to each role is fluid. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} uses \code{author} for contributors that should go at the head of the reference, and \code{editor} for others. As well as the normal ones you can use the author\slash editor types \code{performer}, \code{conductor}, \code{director} and \code{reader}.
 
@@ -2818,7 +3106,7 @@ Charles Chaplin (dir.), \emph{Modern Times} (United Artists, 1936).
 
 \tip{You can place up to four credits in the editor position, more if any of them correspond to the built-in editor types like \texttt{commentator} or \texttt{translator}.
   If you do supply a lot of credits, the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} recommends you shift them to the end of the reference.
-  You can do this with the \texttt{endeditor} option.}
+  You can do this with the \key{endeditor} option.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <OGS \S15.14.2>
@@ -2901,7 +3189,7 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prints all information about the transmission,
 
 \spec{\enquote{EpisodeTitle}, \emph{SeriesTitle}, \lit{Episode} EpisodeNumber, Channel, Date.}
 
-\tip{If the episode has a true title, the episide descriptor (e.g. ‘Episode 1’) goes in the \code{note} field.
+\tip{If the episode has a true title, the episide descriptor (e.g. \enquote{Episode 1}) goes in the \code{note} field.
   If it doesn't, the episode descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to remove the quote marks.
   Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the episode descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
 
@@ -3009,9 +3297,14 @@ Malala Yousafzai, \enquote{Making a Wish for Action on Global Education: Malala
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\section{Images}
+\section{Images and works of art}
 
-\tip{If desired, use \code{titleaddon} to specify the type of image.}
+\tip{If you need the type of image or arrtwork to appear in square brackets,
+  put it in \code{titleaddon}. Otherwise, put it in \code{type}.}
+
+\tip{Use \code{institution} (a list) or \code{venue} (a literal) for the
+  organization, museum, gallery or building physically hosting the image, and
+  \code{location} for where it is.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR \S18.8.5>
@@ -3023,12 +3316,14 @@ M. Clarke, \enquote{Exports of Coal to the IFS} [poster], Manchester Art Gallery
   author = {M. Clarke},
   title = {Exports of Coal to the IFS},
   titleaddon = {poster},
-  organization = {Manchester Art Gallery},
+  institution = {Manchester Art Gallery},
   url = {http://www.machestergalleries.org/the-collections/search-the-collection/display.php?EMUSESSID=70bd7f1a388d79a82f52ea9aae713ef2&irn=4128},
   urldate = {2013-11-05}}
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\tip{Use \code{organization} for the website or online location of the image.}
+
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR \S18.8.5>
 {ibwNDcgs}
@@ -3037,18 +3332,130 @@ M. Clarke, \enquote{Exports of Coal to the IFS} [poster], Manchester Art Gallery
 \begin{Verbatim}
 @image{ibwNDcgs,
   title = {Christ the Good Shepherd},
-  note = {stained glass window, Church of St Erfyl, Llanerfyl, Powys},
+  type = {stained glass window},
+  venue = {Church of St Erfyl},
+  location = {Llanerfyl, Powys},
   organization = {Imaging the Bible in Wales Database},
   url = {http://imagingthebible.llgc.org.uk/object/1884},
   urldate = {2013-11-10}}
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{davinci1480mr}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@artwork{davinci1480mr,
+  author = {given=Leonardo, family=da Vinci},
+  title = {Madonna of the Rocks},
+  type = {oil on canvas},
+  note = {78 x 48.5 in\adddot},
+  year = {1480s},
+  date+an = {=inferred},
+  institution = {Louvre},
+  location = {Paris}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{gormley1998an}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@artwork{gormley1998an,
+  author = {Anthony Gormley},
+  title = {Angel of the {North}},
+  date = {1998},
+  type = {sculpture},
+  location = {Low Fell, Gateshead}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{rodin1882k}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@artwork{rodin1882k,
+  author = {Auguste Rodin},
+  title = {The Kiss},
+  date = {1882},
+  type = {marble},
+  institution = {Musée Rodin},
+  location = {Paris}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Performances}
+
+\tip{Use \code{origdate} for the date when the play, ballet, opera, or whatever
+  was written or premièred, and \code{date} for the date of the performance you
+  are referencing. You can specify what these dates signify with the
+  (non-standard) \code{origdatetype} and \code{datetype} fields. You can also
+  use \code{eventdate} in place of \code{date}, but then you won't be able to
+  specify the type.}
+
+\tip{As for recordings, you can use the \code{author} and \code{editor} fields
+  to provide various credits. As for artworks, use \code{venue} and
+  \code{location} for where the performance occurred, and \code{organization}
+  for a website or organization hosting a recording of the performance online.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ashton1937wb}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@performance{ashton1937wb,
+  author = {Frederick Ashton},
+  origdate = {1937},
+  title = {A Wedding Bouquet},
+  venue = {Royal Opera House},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {2004-10-22}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{lord2007dc}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@performance{lord2007dc,
+  author = {Jon Lord},
+  date = {2007-10-20},
+  title = {Durham Concerto},
+  editor = {{Liverpool Philharmonic Orchestra}},
+  editortype = {performer},
+  editora = {Mischa Damev},
+  editoratype = {conductor},
+  venue = {Durham Cathedral},
+  location = {Durham}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{judge1995mnd}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@performance{judge1995mnd,
+  options = {useauthor=false,useeditor=false},
+  author = {William Shakespeare},
+  title = {A Midsummer Night's Dream},
+  editor = {Ian Judge},
+  editortype = {director},
+  date = {1995-02-26},
+  venue = {Theatre Royal},
+  location = {Newcastle upon Tyne}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
 \chapter{Digital media}\label{sec:electronic}
 \chapterprecis{online, software, dataset}
 
 In Section 18.8.5 of \emph{New Hart's Rules}, some publication dates are printed in parentheses and some are left bare.
-In theory, the difference should be that parentheses indicate ‘proper’ publication (bare dates are when the resource was created or issued). In practice, it seems to be random. I have therefore decided to ignore the variation and leave all such dates in parentheses.
+In theory, the difference should be that parentheses indicate \enquote{proper} publication (bare dates are when the resource was created or issued). In practice, it seems to be random. I have therefore decided to ignore the variation and leave all such dates in parentheses.
 
 \section{Website articles}
 
@@ -3160,14 +3567,14 @@ Stephen McEwen, \enquote{Tan Twan Eng Interview: \enquote{I Have No Alternative
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\tip{Unlike standard \textsf{biblatex}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} supports \code{maintitle} for online entries and prints the result in italics. For more portability, you could either hard-code the italics into the \code{organization} field or use the \code{article} entry type.}
+
 \info{It is not made explicit why \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} is in italics and \emph{Wikipedia} is not.
   It might be historical or customary, because \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} was established as a print publication and \emph{Wikipedia} has only been online;
   it might be because \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} is a Latin title;
   it might reflect an opinion on the two resources;
   or it may just be illustrative of variant practice.}
 
-\tip{Unlike standard \textsf{biblatex}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} supports \code{maintitle} for online entries and prints the result in italics. For more portability, you could either hard-code the italics into the \code{organization} field or use the \code{article} entry type.}
-
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR \S18.8.5>
 {wp2013oup}
@@ -3237,7 +3644,7 @@ Shakespeare's Globe, \enquote{On this day in 1611 first production of The Tempes
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\tip{If it feels odd putting the entire content of a tweet in your reference, \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using a descriptor like ‘Twitter post’ instead of the title. As described in \cref{sec:broadcasts}, you can do this either by annotating the title field with the keyword \code{descriptor} or by using the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field in place of \code{title}.}
+\tip{If it feels odd putting the entire content of a tweet in your reference, \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using a descriptor like \enquote{Twitter post} instead of the title. As described in \cref{sec:broadcasts}, you can do this either by annotating the title field with the keyword \code{descriptor} or by using the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field in place of \code{title}.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 {oup2015tweet}
@@ -3358,7 +3765,7 @@ Use the \code{jurisdiction} entry type for citing cases.
 
 \tip{Several additional pagination types are defined for use with legal citations:
   \val{article}, \val{clause}, \val{regulation}, and \val{rule} all work as normal.
-  The default is a bare number (\val{none}), indicating a page reference, though EU and ECHR cases default to using the ‘para’ (\val{paragraph}) prefix.
+  The default is a bare number (\val{none}), indicating a page reference, though EU and ECHR cases default to using the \enquote{para} (\val{paragraph}) prefix.
   There is also an alternative pagination type for paragraphs, \val{[]}, which prints the number in square brackets instead of giving it a prefix.
 }
 
@@ -3448,6 +3855,7 @@ Use the \code{jurisdiction} entry type for citing cases.
 \textcite[13]{rvg2004}
 \end{egcite}
 
+
 \tip{If a report is published a long time after the decision, you can put the decision date in \code{origdate} to clarify the situation.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
@@ -3571,7 +3979,7 @@ Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} are inconsiste
   The \key{ecli} option determines under what circumstances the identifier is printed.}
 
 \tip{European cases still get sorted by title, even if the entry begins with the case number.
-  Use \code{sorttitle} if you would rather they were sorted under ‘Case’ or ‘Joined Cases’.}
+  Use \code{sorttitle} if you would rather they were sorted under \enquote{Case} or \enquote{Joined Cases}.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <OGS \S13.4.4>
@@ -3591,7 +3999,7 @@ Case C–118/07 \emph{Commission of the European Communities v Finland} [2002] E
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\tip{Indicate Commission Decisions by putting \code{commission} in the \code{institution} field. If a decision has a formal decision number, put this in the \code{number} field. Put the case number (including the word ‘Case’ if needed) in either the \code{titleaddon}, \code{parvolume}, or \code{userb} field.}
+\tip{Indicate Commission Decisions by putting \code{commission} in the \code{institution} field. If a decision has a formal decision number, put this in the \code{number} field. Put the case number (including the word \enquote{Case} if needed) in either the \code{titleaddon}, \code{parvolume}, or \code{userb} field.}
 
 \tip{An unfortunate side effect of this is that is not possible to use either the parallel or neutral citation idiom to get a reference to look like the following. In such cases, use the \code{note} field to provide the second citation.}
 
@@ -3909,7 +4317,7 @@ Law Commission, \emph{Intoxication and Criminal Liability} (Law Comm No 314, Cm
 it provides the \code{commentary} entry type simply as an alias for \code{book}.
 
 \chapter{Specialist materials}\label{sec:special}
-\chapterprecis{misc, unpublished, letter}
+\chapterprecis{misc, unpublished, letter, manuscript}
 
 \section{Poems}\label{sec:poem}
 
@@ -4023,7 +4431,7 @@ Play titles, like those of epic poems, are set in italics rather than quoted.
 
 \section{Manuscripts}\label{sec:ms}
 
-\spec{Author, Title/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.}
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.}
 
 With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can enter manuscripts in either of two ways. The first uses the \code{unpublished} entry type.
 
@@ -4155,6 +4563,52 @@ Bodleian Library, Oxford, MS Rawlinson D. 520, fo. 7.
 \end{bibexbox}
 
 
+\section{Letters}
+
+These examples relate to letters held personally or online. For letters that
+form part of archival collections, see the section on manuscripts above.
+
+Note that it is usually acceptable to exclude personal communications from
+the reference section, and simply cite them in the text (in which case you may
+not need the \pkg{biblatex} machinery).
+
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}/Descriptor, Date.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.11.1*>
+{anon2001pl}
+Personal letter to the author, 2 May 2001.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@letter{anon2001pl,
+  title = {Personal letter to the author},
+  title+an = {=descriptor},
+  date = {2001-05-02}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+In the absence of any explicit rationale governing whether the date is
+parenthetical, in \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} the presence of a URL
+will trigger the use of parentheses.
+
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}/Descriptor [HowPublished], (Date), OnlineAccess.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.15.3*>
+{ritter2001rp}%
+R. M. Ritter, \enquote{Revised proofs} [email to H. E. Cox], (1 Aug.\@ 2001), \url{ogs@ritter.org.uk}, accessed 3 Aug.\@ 2001.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@letter{ritter2001rp,
+  author = {R. M. Ritter},
+  title = {Revised proofs},
+  howpublished = {email to H. E. Cox},
+  date = {2001-08-01},
+  url = {ogs@ritter.org.uk},
+  urldate = {2001-08-03}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
 \printbibliography[notcategory=hidden]
 \end{document}
 %% 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.bib
index a76916475a9..89772f4eb0c 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.bib
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.bib
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
 @reference{ritter2002ogs,
-  author = {R. M. Ritter},
+  editor = {R. M. Ritter},
+  editortype= {editorcm},
   title = {The {Oxford} Guide to Style},
   date = {2002},
   publisher = {Oxford University Press},
@@ -344,6 +345,23 @@
   journaltitle = {Philosophy and Phenomenological Research},
   url = {http://cogprints.org/5780/1/ECSRAP.F07.pdf},
   pubstate = {inpress}}
+@suppperiodical{ball2015ed,
+  author = {Alexander Ball},
+  title = {Editorial},
+  title+an = {=descriptor},
+  date = {2015},
+  journaltitle = {International Journal of Digital Curation},
+  volume = {10},
+  number = {1},
+  pages = {i-v},
+  doi = {10.2218/ijdc.v10i1.376}}
+@suppperiodical{jccm2006ed,
+  title = {\enquote{What a Disaster} and Why Does This Question Matter?},
+  date = {2006},
+  note = {Editorial},
+  journaltitle   = {Journal of Contingencies and Crisis Management},
+  volume = {14},
+  pages = {1-2}}
 @review{dean1995rpb,
   author = {J. Dean},
   related = {basiron1994mel},
@@ -816,12 +834,23 @@
 @suppbook{gill1987intro,
   author = {Roma Gill},
   title = {introduction},
+  title+an = {=descriptor},
   booktitle = {The Complete Works of Christopher Marlow},
   volume = {1},
   origlocation = {Oxford},
   origdate = {1987},
   edition = {reprint},
   date = {2001}}
+@suppcollection{atwan2000fw,
+  author = {Robert Atwan},
+  title = {foreword},
+  title+an = {=descriptor},
+  address = {Boston},
+  booktitle = {The Best American Essays of the Century},
+  date = {2000},
+  editor = {Joyce Carol Oates and Robert Atwan},
+  publisher = {Houghton},
+  pages = {x-xvi}}
 @proceedings{icp1975pic,
   title = {Proceedings of the {XIV} {International} {Congress} of {Papyrologists}},
   subtitle = {{Oxford}, 24--31 {July} 1974},
@@ -989,6 +1018,70 @@
   type = {Ph.D. diss.},
   institution = {University of Chicago},
   date = {1970}}
+@booklet{msbh1921fvd,
+  title = {The Facts about Venereal Diseases},
+  date = {1921},
+  howpublished = {distributed by the Missouri State Board of Health, Division of Venereal Diseases},
+  location = {Jefferson City, MO}}
+@booklet{lloyds2015m,
+  author = {{Lloyds TSB Bank plc}},
+  title = {Mortgages},
+  date = {2015},
+  howpublished = {obtained in Paisley branch}}
+@patent{petroff.stapelbroek1980bib,
+  author = {Petroff, M.~D. and Stapelbroek, M.~G.},
+  title = {Blocked impurity band detectors},
+  date = {1986-02-04},
+  origdate = {1980-10-23},
+  type = {patentus},
+  number = {4,586,960},
+  location = {Washington, DC},
+  publisher = {U.S. Patent and Trademark Office}}
+@patent{arduengo.etal2001pmi,
+  author = {Arduengo, III, Anthony J. and Gentry, Jr., Frederick P.
+    and Taverkere,  Prakash~K. and Simmons, III, Howard E.},
+  title = {Process for manufacture of imidazoles},
+  year = {2001},
+  type = {patentus},
+  holder = {{E.~I. DuPont}},
+  number = {6177575}}
+@patent{pm1981opa,
+  author = {{Phillipp Morris Inc.}},
+  title = {Optical perforating apparatus and system},
+  origdate = {1981-01-07},
+  date = {1985-05-15},
+  type = {patenteu},
+  number = {EP0021165}}
+@patent{hideki1992qmc,
+  author = {U. Hideki},
+  title = {Quadrature Modulation Circuit},
+  type = {patentjp},
+  number = {152932/92},
+  date = {1992-05-20}}
+@standard{bs5605:1990,
+  sortyear = {1990},
+  title = {Recommendations for citing and referencing published material},
+  number = {BS~5605:1990},
+  shorthand = {BS5605},
+  organization = {British Standards Institute}}
+@standard{w3c2017html5.2,
+  title = {{HTML} 5.2},
+  editor = {Steve Faulkner and Arron Eicholz and Travis Leithead and
+    Alex Danilo and Sangwhan Moon},
+  date = {2017-12-14},
+  type = {W3C Recommendation},
+  organization = {World Wide Web Consortium},
+  url = {https://www.w3.org/TR/html52/},
+  urldate = {2018-02-17}}
+@standard{ietf.rfc1155,
+  author = {M. T. Rose and K. McCloghrie},
+  title = {Structure and identification of management information for {TCP/IP}-based internets},
+  date = {1990-05},
+  organization = {Internet Engineering Task Force},
+  series = {Request for Comments},
+  type = {Internet Standard},
+  number = {RFC~1155/STD~16},
+  doi = {10.17487/RFC1155}}
 @music{carter1991fsq,
   author = {Elliott Carter},
   title = {The Four String Quartets},
@@ -1171,15 +1264,65 @@
   author = {M. Clarke},
   title = {Exports of Coal to the IFS},
   titleaddon = {poster},
-  organization = {Manchester Art Gallery},
+  institution = {Manchester Art Gallery},
   url = {http://www.machestergalleries.org/the-collections/search-the-collection/display.php?EMUSESSID=70bd7f1a388d79a82f52ea9aae713ef2&irn=4128},
   urldate = {2013-11-05}}
 @image{ibwNDcgs,
   title = {Christ the Good Shepherd},
-  note = {stained glass window, Church of St Erfyl, Llanerfyl, Powys},
+  type = {stained glass window},
+  venue = {Church of St Erfyl},
+  location = {Llanerfyl, Powys},
   organization = {Imaging the Bible in Wales Database},
   url = {http://imagingthebible.llgc.org.uk/object/1884},
   urldate = {2013-11-10}}
+@artwork{davinci1480mr,
+  author = {given=Leonardo, family=da Vinci},
+  title = {Madonna of the Rocks},
+  type = {oil on canvas},
+  note = {78 x 48.5 in\adddot},
+  year = {1480s},
+  date+an = {=inferred},
+  institution = {Louvre},
+  location = {Paris}}
+@artwork{gormley1998an,
+  author = {Anthony Gormley},
+  title = {Angel of the {North}},
+  date = {1998},
+  type = {sculpture},
+  location = {Low Fell, Gateshead}}
+@artwork{rodin1882k,
+  author = {Auguste Rodin},
+  title = {The Kiss},
+  date = {1882},
+  type = {marble},
+  institution = {Musée Rodin},
+  location = {Paris}}
+@performance{ashton1937wb,
+  author = {Frederick Ashton},
+  origdate = {1937},
+  title = {A Wedding Bouquet},
+  venue = {Royal Opera House},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {2004-10-22}}
+@performance{lord2007dc,
+  author = {Jon Lord},
+  date = {2007-10-20},
+  title = {Durham Concerto},
+  editor = {{Liverpool Philharmonic Orchestra}},
+  editortype = {performer},
+  editora = {Mischa Damev},
+  editoratype = {conductor},
+  venue = {Durham Cathedral},
+  location = {Durham}}
+@performance{judge1995mnd,
+  options = {useauthor=false,useeditor=false},
+  author = {William Shakespeare},
+  title = {A Midsummer Night's Dream},
+  editor = {Ian Judge},
+  editortype = {director},
+  date = {1995-02-26},
+  venue = {Theatre Royal},
+  location = {Newcastle upon Tyne}}
 @online{bbc2013cgh,
   author = {{BBC News}},
   title = {Colchester General Hospital},
@@ -1577,3 +1720,14 @@
   pages = {11\recto-11\verso},
   layer = {inf},
   bookpagination = {folio}}
+@letter{anon2001pl,
+  title = {Personal letter to the author},
+  title+an = {=descriptor},
+  date = {2001-05-02}}
+@letter{ritter2001rp,
+  author = {R. M. Ritter},
+  title = {Revised proofs},
+  howpublished = {email to H. E. Cox},
+  date = {2001-08-01},
+  url = {ogs@ritter.org.uk},
+  urldate = {2001-08-03}}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.pdf
index 29a73c62ca3..0d91cf83917 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear-doc.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear-doc.pdf
index 0a4b5f8deac..b703cd87a44 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear-doc.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear-doc.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear-doc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear-doc.tex
index b8b75106a52..636deda5ea9 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear-doc.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear-doc.tex
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
 %% See:     http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
 %% ----------------------------------------------------------------
 %% 
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
 \ProvidesFile{oxyear-doc.tex}
     [\Version\space Author-year biblatex style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
 \PassOptionsToPackage{style=oxyear,varissuedate,anon}{biblatex}
@@ -134,6 +134,15 @@
   {\multicitedelim}
   {\usebibmacro{postnote}\finentrypunct}
 \makeatother
+\DeclareSourcemap{%
+  \maps[datatype=bibtex]{%
+    \map[overwrite=true]{%
+      \pernottype{legslation}
+      \pernottype{legal}
+      \step[fieldset=shorthand, null=true]
+    }%
+  }%
+}
 
 \hypersetup{pdfborder={0 0 0},pdfencoding=auto}
 \usepackage[noabbrev,capitalize,nameinlink]{cleveref}
@@ -258,25 +267,25 @@ The style is self-contained, so you can load it with \pkg{biblatex}:
 
 The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
 
-\begin{docKey}{altthesis}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
-  Puts the thesis type inside, rather than outside, the parenthetical publication block.
-\end{docKey}
-
 \begin{docKey}{anon}{=\val{literal}|\val{long}|\val{short}}{default \val{short}, initially \val{literal}}
   Affects what happens if the author name matches the value of \cs{oxrefanon}.
-  By default, this is ‘Anonymous’, but you could change it a different word (such as ‘Anonimo’) instead.
+  By default, this is \enquote{Anonymous}, but you could change it a different word (such as \enquote{Anonimo}) instead.
   \begin{itemize}
   \item\docValue{literal}
     means no special handling is used.
   \item\docValue{long}
-    will print the unabbreviated localization string \code{anon} (‘Anonymous’) instead of the author name
+    will print the unabbreviated localization string \code{anon} (\enquote{Anonymous}) instead of the author name
     in citations and the bibliography.
   \item\docValue{short}
-    will print the abbreviated localization string \code{anon} (‘Anon.\@’) instead of the author name
+    will print the abbreviated localization string \code{anon} (\enquote{Anon.\@}) instead of the author name
     in citations and the bibliography.
   \end{itemize}
 \end{docKey}
 
+\begin{docKey}{bookseries}{=\val{in}|\val{out}}{default \val{in}, initially \val{in}}
+  Puts the series information for a book \docValue{in}side or \docValue{out}side the parenthetical publication block.
+\end{docKey}
+
 \begin{docKey}{court-plain}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
   Prints courts of decision without parentheses.
 \end{docKey}
@@ -301,32 +310,42 @@ The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
   Surrounds URLs with angle brackets.
 \end{docKey}
 
+\begin{docKey}{issuedate-plain}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
+  Removes the parentheses around the date of a periodical without a volume number.
+  This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
+  (This option was previously called \key{varissuedate}.)
+\end{docKey}
+
 \begin{docKey}{issuestyle}{=\val{slash}|\val{colon}|\val{comma}|\val{parens}}{default \val{slash}, initially \val{slash}}
   Affects how journal volumes and numbers are printed.
   \begin{itemize}
   \item\docValue{slash}
-    separates the two with a solidus, e.g. ‘23/2’.
+    separates the two with a solidus, e.g. \enquote{23/2}.
   \item\docValue{colon}
-    separates the two with a colon and space, e.g. ‘23: 2’.
+    separates the two with a colon and space, e.g. \enquote{23: 2}.
     It is intended for use with \textsf{oxnotes}\slash\textsf{oxnum} and not recommended for this style.
   \item\docValue{comma}
-    separates the two with a comma and space, e.g. ‘23, 2’.
+    separates the two with a comma and space, e.g. \enquote{23, 2}.
   \item\docValue{parens}
-    sets off the issue number in parentheses, e.g. ‘23 (2)’.
+    sets off the issue number in parentheses, e.g. \enquote{23 (2)}.
   \end{itemize}
 \end{docKey}
 
 \begin{docKey}{mergedate}{=\val{maximum}|\val{compact}|\val{basic}|\val{minimum}|\val{year}|\val{false}}{default \val{year}, initially \val{year}}
-  Affects how the date at the start of the references relates to the date in the ‘normal’ position.
+  Affects how the date at the start of the references relates to the date in the \enquote{normal} position.
   The default value of \val{year} is intended for use with the default setting of \key{labeldate}\texttt{=}\val{year}.
-  If you set \key{labeldate} to something else, you will probably want to set this option to \val{compact} or \val{maximum}.
+  If you set \key{labeldate} to something else, you will probably want to set this option to \val{compact} or \val{maximum}. It can also be set on a per-type basis.
 \end{docKey}
 
 \begin{docKey}{nolocation}{}{no value, initially unset}
-  Replaces missing locations with ‘n.p.’ or the localized equivalent in books, collections, reference works, proceedings, and similar entry types. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
+  Replaces missing locations with \enquote{n.p.} or the localized equivalent in books, collections, reference works, proceedings, and similar entry types. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
   Alternatively, it may be set on a per-entry basis.
 \end{docKey}
 
+\begin{docKey}{nonodate}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
+  Suppresses the printing of the \code{nodate} localization string when an entry is missing a recognizable date. It can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis. It is automatically set to \val{true} for entries with a \code{sortyear}, on the assumption that the date has been given in a non-date field (e.g.\@ the number of a standard).
+\end{docKey}
+
 \begin{docKey}{nopublisher}{}{no value, initially unset}
   Removes publisher name from all entries. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
 \end{docKey}
@@ -340,6 +359,11 @@ The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
 \end{docKey}
 
 
+\begin{docKey}{thesis}{=\val{in}|\val{out}|\val{plain}}{default \val{out}, initially \val{out}}
+  Puts the thesis type \docValue{in}side or \docValue{out}side the parenthetical publication block,
+  while \docValue{plain} removes the parentheses entirely.
+\end{docKey}
+
 \begin{docKey}{timefirst}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
   Prints the time (if provided) before the date instead of after it.
   This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
@@ -351,11 +375,6 @@ The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
   This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
 \end{docKey}
 
-\begin{docKey}{varissuedate}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
-  Removes the parentheses around the date of a periodical without a volume number.
-  This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
-\end{docKey}
-
 \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} makes use of Biber-specific techniques to solve some of the challenges presented by Oxford style.
 It will not stop you from using Bib\TeX\ instead but, if you do, only simple and standard entries will work.
 In particular, manuscripts, legal references and anything involving related entries will be adversely affected.
@@ -392,7 +411,7 @@ Examples that follow standard \textsf{biblatex} semantics, and are therefore
   Code used in bibliography file.
 \end{tcolorbox}
 
-Examples that have been ‘hacked’ in some way, and are therefore not portable
+Examples that have been \enquote{hacked} in some way, and are therefore not portable
 to other styles, are in amber:
 
 \begin{tcolorbox}%
@@ -464,35 +483,17 @@ but by no means all of them will be supported.
 For information on installing the styles, and for the documented source code,
 see the separate documentation file \href{./oxref.pdf}{\texttt{oxref.pdf}}
 
-\section{To do}
+\section{Stability}
 
 The \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} family of styles is currently at \fileversion.
-As mentioned above, what the styles \emph{should} be doing is open to some
-interpretation, so at the moment I am open to the idea of changing how the
-styles handle cases not covered by the two style manuals. Please leave your
-thoughts on the GitHub issue tracker.\footnote{\url{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}}
-At some point version 1.0 will be released, after which the default (expected)
-behaviour of the styles will be fixed, though alternative behaviour may be added.
-
-I do not have any examples to work from for the following entry types, so they
-are currently untested. If you have strong feelings about how they should be
-rendered in Oxford style and can provide me with a sample reference or several,
-I would be most glad to hear from you:
-
-\begin{multicols}{3}
-  \begin{itemize}\firmlist
-    \item suppbook
-    \item booklet
-    \item suppcollection
-    \item patent
-    \item suppperiodical
-    \item artwork
-    \item commentary
-    \item letter
-    \item performance
-    \item standard
-  \end{itemize}
-\end{multicols}
+I have no further features planned, so unless there is popular demand otherwise,
+it should be bug-fix releases only between now and the release of version 1.0.
+When that happens, the default (expected) behaviour of the styles will be frozen,
+meaning I will do my best to avoid backwards-incompatible changes, though
+alternative behaviour may be added. If you spot any aspects of the styles that
+could be improved before then, especially for the cases not covered by the two
+style manuals, please leave your thoughts on the GitHub issue tracker.%
+\footnote{\url{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}}
 
 You are of course encouraged to report any bugs you discover on the
 \href{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}{GitHub issue tracker}
@@ -522,7 +523,7 @@ Pages are set off with a colon, and multiple works are separated with a semicolo
   [72]{hankinson1989gba}
 \end{egcite}
 
-Up to two author names are given, after which ‘et al.’ is used.
+Up to two author names are given, after which \enquote{et al.} is used.
 
 \begin{egcite}{(Barnes and Griffin 1989; Brady et al. 1994)}
 \parencite{barnes.griffin1989pte,%
@@ -544,12 +545,12 @@ If a short author label is provided, it is used in place of the full author.
 
 \emph{New Hart's Rules} is mostly consistent with this, but has some variations where the author and date are separated by a comma, and where multiple references are also separated by commas.
 
-\section{Missing and inferred attribution}
+\section{Missing or inferred attribution}
 
 \subsection{Missing attribution}
-The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prefers anonymous works to have ‘Anonymous’ in place of the author name, while \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using ‘Anon.\@’ or a short title.
+The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prefers anonymous works to have \enquote{Anonymous} in place of the author name, while \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using \enquote{Anon.\@} or a short title.
 
-\tip{\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will not automatically generate anonymous labels for you, but if you use the \key{anon} option (see \cref{sec:loading}), you can transform an author name of ‘Anonymous’ (or whatever \cs{oxrefanon} is set to) in your .bib file to either the long or short localization string \code{anon}.
+\tip{\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will not automatically generate anonymous labels for you, but if you use the \key{anon} option (see \cref{sec:loading}), you can transform an author name of \enquote{Anonymous} (or whatever \cs{oxrefanon} is set to) in your .bib file to either the long or short localization string \code{anon}.
 }
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
@@ -592,7 +593,7 @@ Anon.\@ (1956), \emph{Liber usualis} (Tournai: Desclée).
 
 \subsection{Pseudepigraphy}
 Some older works are known to have been written pseudepigraphically, that is, falsely attributed to a more famous author. The way of indicating this in Oxford style, if desired, is
-to put ‘(Ps.-)’ after the name in the bibliography.
+to put \enquote{(Ps.-)} after the name in the bibliography.
 
 \tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the name with the keyword \code{pseudo}.
 }
@@ -646,7 +647,7 @@ Oxford style is to give the attribution in square brackets.
 \tip{You can also use the syntax from \textsf{biblatex-realauthor}.
   If you do not specify the \code{author}, then \code{realauthor} is treated as an alias for \code{author} annotated with the keyword \code{inferred}.
   The equivalent is true for \code{realeditor}.
-  Note, however, that \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not recognize the \code{userealauthor} and \code{userealeditor} options.}
+  Note, however, that \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not recognize the \key{userealauthor} and \key{userealeditor} options.}
 
 \subsection{Pseudonyms}
 
@@ -762,7 +763,7 @@ Kühner, R., rev. Blass, F. (1890-2), \emph{Ausführliche grammatik der griech
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\tip{Annotate \emph{either} the \code{editor} \emph{or} \code{translator} field with the keyword \code{jointauthor} to promote the name to the joint author position (you cannot do it for both). Note that you have to supply a suitable \code{shortauthor} value yourself; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not calculate it for you.}
+\tip{Annotate \emph{either} the \code{editor} \emph{or} \code{translator} field with the keyword \code{jointauthor} to promote the name to the joint author position (you cannot do it for both). Internally, what this does is move the names to the \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}-specific \code{jointauthor} field; you can use this and \code{jointauthortype} directly if you like, at the cost of portability to other styles. Note that you have to supply a suitable \code{shortauthor} value yourself; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not calculate it for you.}
 
 \section{Titular prefixes}\label{sec:nametitles}
 
@@ -904,10 +905,10 @@ Milne, A. A. (1938), \emph{Pu der Bär} [Ger. trans. of \emph{Winnie the Pooh}]
 
 For periodicals, grey literature, audiovisual and online material, the lack of a place of publication is not surprising; indeed it may be expected. For books, however, it may be remarkable and deserve marking in the bibliography with \enquote{n.p.\@} (for \enquote{no place}).
 
-\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for books, collections, reference works, proceedings and similar entry types, use the \code{nolocation} bibliography option.}
+\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for books, collections, reference works, proceedings and similar entry types, use the \key{nolocation} bibliography option.}
 
-\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for only a specific entry, use the \code{nolocation} entry option instead.
-  This has the feature of hiding the \enquote{n.p.\@} from other styles that do not follow the same convention.}
+\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for only a specific entry, use the \key{nolocation} entry option instead.
+  The advantage of doing this over simply giving \enquote{n.p.\@} as the publisher is that it hides it from other styles that do not follow the same convention.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR \S18.2.9\textdagger>
@@ -924,12 +925,31 @@ Marchetto of Padua (1961), \emph{Pomerium}, ed. G. Vecchi (n.p.).
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\section{Missing or inferred date of publication}
+
+If the date is missing from a work, you can sometimes make an educated guess
+what it should be. It is usual practice to enclose such guesses in square
+brackets.
+
+\tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the
+  \code{date}, \code{origdate}, or \code{eventdate} field with the keyword
+  \code{inferred}.}
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+  date+an = {=inferred},
+\end{tcblisting}
+
+Otherwise, if you don't supply a suitable date, it will be replaced with the
+localization string \code{nodate}. If you don't want this behaviour, you can
+suppress it with the \key{nonodate} option, which can be set globally or on a
+per-type or per-entry basis.
+
 \chapter{Articles and periodicals}\label{sec:article}
 \chapterprecis{article, periodical, suppperiodical, review}
 
 \section{Articles in periodicals with volumes/numbers}
 
-The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} consistently prefers volume and part numbers to be written like \enquote{23/2}, but also discusses formats such as \enquote{23: 2} and \enquote{23 (2)}. \emph{New Hart's Rules} adds \enquote{23, 2} as a further possibility. The latter two are better suited to \textsf{oxyear} which uses a colon to demarcate the page numbers. These variations are implemented as the option \textsf{issuestyle}; see \autoref{sec:loading} for details.
+The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} consistently prefers volume and part numbers to be written like \enquote{23/2}, but also discusses formats such as \enquote{23: 2} and \enquote{23 (2)}. \emph{New Hart's Rules} adds \enquote{23, 2} as a further possibility. The latter two are better suited to \textsf{oxalph}\slash\textsf{oxyear} which use a colon to demarcate the page numbers. These variations are implemented as the option \key{issuestyle}; see \autoref{sec:loading} for details.
 
 \spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number: Pages.}
 
@@ -1214,7 +1234,7 @@ Zhentao, X., Yau, K. K. C., and Stephenson, F. R. (1989) \enquote{Astronomical R
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\tip{Use \code{bookpagination} to force the display of ‘pp.’ (since the number format is odd), and \cs{DeclareNumChars*}\brackets{S} to ensure that \code{S61} is recognized as a number.}%
+\tip{Use \code{bookpagination} to force the display of \enquote{pp.} (since the number format is odd), and \cs{DeclareNumChars*}\brackets{S} to ensure that \code{S61} is recognized as a number.}%
 
 \section{Articles that span multiple issues}
 
@@ -1263,11 +1283,53 @@ Stookey, R. W. (1974), \enquote{Social Structure and Politics in the Yemen Arab
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\section{Editorials and other regular features}
+
+Strictly speaking, when a work is headed \enquote{Editorial} or \enquote{Letter to the Editor}
+in a periodical, this is a descriptor rather than a title.
+
+\tip{If a piece has a true title, the descriptor goes in the \code{note} field.
+  If it doesn't, the descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to remove the quote marks.
+  Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ball2015ed}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@suppperiodical{ball2015ed,
+  author = {Alexander Ball},
+  title = {Editorial},
+  title+an = {=descriptor},
+  date = {2015},
+  journaltitle = {International Journal of Digital Curation},
+  volume = {10},
+  number = {1},
+  pages = {i-v},
+  doi = {10.2218/ijdc.v10i1.376}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{jccm2006ed}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@suppperiodical{jccm2006ed,
+  title = {\enquote{What a Disaster} and Why Does This Question Matter?},
+  date = {2006},
+  note = {Editorial},
+  journaltitle   = {Journal of Contingencies and Crisis Management},
+  volume = {14},
+  pages = {1-2}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
 \section{Reviews}
 
 \spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{review of} ReviewedWork, \lit{in} \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number: Pages.}
 
-\tip{To get this format, use a separate entry for the reviewed item, reference it in the ‘related’ field, and use the key ‘reviewof’ as the ‘relatedtype’.}
+\tip{To get this format, use a separate entry for the reviewed item, reference it in the \enquote{related} field, and use the key \enquote{reviewof} as the \enquote{relatedtype}.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <OGS \S15.4.4\textdagger>
@@ -1435,7 +1497,7 @@ Hankinson, R. J. (1988) (ed.), \emph{Method, Medicine, and Metaphysics} (Edmonto
 
 Biblatex uses \code{reference} for encyclopaedias and dictionaries, which are typically made up of many small contributions by distinct authors and compiled by an editorial board whose membership might change between successive editions. From a database perspective, reference works are like collections in that they have no single author (a reference work written by a single author should use the \code{book} entry type instead).
 
-\tip{The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} considers the titles of reference works to be more important and memorable than those of the editor, and so lists the title first, but \emph{New Hart's Rules} doesn't. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} takes the former approach, but you can switch to the latter by setting the \texttt{useeditor} option back to true for this type.}
+\tip{The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} considers the titles of reference works to be more important and memorable than those of the editor, and so lists the title first, but \emph{New Hart's Rules} doesn't. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} takes the former approach, but you can switch to the latter by setting the \key{useeditor} option back to true for this type.}
 
 \begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
 \ExecuteBibliographyOptions[reference,mvreference]{useeditor=true}
@@ -1793,7 +1855,7 @@ Bettelheim, B. (1976), \emph{The Uses of Enchantment: The Meaning and Importance
 
 \subsection{Reprints}
 
-\spec{Author (Year/Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{repr.} Location: Publisher).}
+\spec{Author (Year–Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{repr.} Location: Publisher).}
 
 \tip{Use localization key \code{reprint} as the edition. For a revised reprint, use \code{revisedreprint}.}
 
@@ -1833,7 +1895,7 @@ Southern, R. W. (1991), \emph{Saint Anselm: A Portrait in a Landscape} (rev. rep
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\spec{Author (Year/Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{facs. edn.}, Location: Publisher).}
+\spec{Author (Year–Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{facs. edn.}, Location: Publisher).}
 
 \tip{Use localization key \code{facsimile} as the edition.}
 
@@ -2217,6 +2279,13 @@ Dahlhaus, C. (1971), \enquote{Miszellen zur Musiktheorie des 15.\@ Jahrhunderts}
 
 \section{Supplementary works in books and collections}
 
+If the work is headed \enquote{Introduction}, \enquote{Foreword}, \enquote{Afterword}, or similar,
+this is technically a descriptor rather than a title.
+
+\tip{If the work has a true title, the descriptor goes in the \code{note} field.
+  If it doesn't, the descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to correct the formatting.
+  Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
+
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR \S18.2.6*\textdagger>
 {gill1987intro}
@@ -2226,6 +2295,7 @@ Gill, R. (1987), introduction in \emph{The Complete Works of Christopher Marlow}
 @suppbook{gill1987intro,
   author = {Roma Gill},
   title = {introduction},
+  title+an = {=descriptor},
   booktitle = {The Complete Works of Christopher Marlow},
   volume = {1},
   origlocation = {Oxford},
@@ -2235,6 +2305,34 @@ Gill, R. (1987), introduction in \emph{The Complete Works of Christopher Marlow}
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{atwan2000fw}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@suppcollection{atwan2000fw,
+  author = {Robert Atwan},
+  title = {foreword},
+  title+an = {=descriptor},
+  address = {Boston},
+  booktitle = {The Best American Essays of the Century},
+  date = {2000},
+  editor = {Joyce Carol Oates and Robert Atwan},
+  publisher = {Houghton},
+  pages = {x-xvi}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+It is quite rare for such items to have a true title in addition, so previous
+versions of \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} treated all titles of \texttt{suppbook}
+entries as descriptors.
+
+\tip{To restore the previous behaviour, include the following code:}
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppbook]{title}{#1}
+\end{tcblisting}
+
 \chapter{Works presented at meetings}\label{sec:proceedings}
 \chapterprecis{proceedings, mvproceedings, inproceedings, unpublished}
 
@@ -2530,7 +2628,13 @@ CNNR/GMH (Comisión Nacional de Reparación y Reconciliación y Grupo de Memoria
 
 \section{Reports with a type or series}
 
-\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, Series, Number (Location: Institution).}
+\tip{The number of a report will only be printed if you also supply a type or
+  series, or both. The difference between the two is that the series will be
+  separated from the (type and) number by a comma, while only a space
+  separates the type and number. In addition, if you supply a series but no
+  type, the number will be prefixed by `No.\@' or the localized equivalent.}
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, Series, Type Number (Location: Institution).}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2>
 {opcs1979amt}
@@ -2548,8 +2652,6 @@ Office of Population Censuses and Surveys (1979a), \emph{Area Mortality Tables:
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, Type Number (Location: Institution).}
-
 \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2>
 {opcs1979pnc}
 Office of Population Censuses and Surveys (1979b), \emph{Projections of the New Commonwealth and Pakistani Population}, OPCS Monitor PP2 79/1 (London)
@@ -2583,6 +2685,25 @@ Rosenblatt, J., et al. (1988), \emph{The Common Agricultural Policy of the Europ
 \end{bibexbox}
 
 
+\section{Jointly published reports}
+
+It is more common with reports than with books for a work to be branded
+jointly by several issuing organizations. Neither the \emph{Oxford Guide to
+Style} nor \emph{New Hart's Rules} give explicit guidance on this, but I
+suggest handling it by giving corresponding lists as the \code{location}
+and \code{institution}:
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+  location = {Place 1 and Place 2 and Place 3},
+  institution = {Organization 1 and Organization 2 and Organization 3},
+\end{tcblisting}
+
+This will be printed as follows:
+
+\begin{tcolorbox}
+(Place 1: Organization 1, Place 2: Organization 2, and Place 3: Organization 3)
+\end{tcolorbox}
+
 \section{Theses}
 
 \spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, Type (Institution).}
@@ -2602,12 +2723,194 @@ Blackburn, B. J. (1970), \enquote{The Lupus Problem}, Ph.D. diss. (University of
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-The following form is also supported: to use it, pass the \texttt{altthesis} option.
+The following forms are also supported; to use them, pass the \key{thesis} option:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+  \item \key{thesis}\texttt{=}\val{in}\par
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title} (Type, Institution).}
+  \item \key{thesis}\texttt{=}\val{plain}\par
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, Type, Institution.}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Booklets, leaflets, and other formal but unpublished texts}
+
+There are no obvious examples of this kind of material in the \emph{Oxford Guide
+to Style} or \emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{msbh1921fvd}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@booklet{msbh1921fvd,
+  title = {The Facts about Venereal Diseases},
+  date = {1921},
+  howpublished = {distributed by the Missouri State Board of Health, Division of Venereal Diseases},
+  location = {Jefferson City, MO}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{lloyds2015m}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@booklet{lloyds2015m,
+  author = {{Lloyds TSB Bank plc}},
+  title = {Mortgages},
+  date = {2015},
+  howpublished = {obtained in Paisley branch}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Patents}
+
+There are no examples of patents in the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} or
+\emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
+
+Following the conventions from \pkg{biblatex-chicago}, use \texttt{origdate} for
+the date the patent was filed (or the application was published), and
+\texttt{date} for the date the patent was finally issued or published.
+
+\tip{You can override the default date descriptions with the (non-standard)
+\code{origdatetype} and \code{datetype} fields.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{petroff.stapelbroek1980bib}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@patent{petroff.stapelbroek1980bib,
+  author = {Petroff, M.~D. and Stapelbroek, M.~G.},
+  title = {Blocked impurity band detectors},
+  date = {1986-02-04},
+  origdate = {1980-10-23},
+  type = {patentus},
+  number = {4,586,960},
+  location = {Washington, DC},
+  publisher = {U.S. Patent and Trademark Office}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{arduengo.etal2001pmi}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@patent{arduengo.etal2001pmi,
+  author = {Arduengo, III, Anthony J. and Gentry, Jr., Frederick P.
+    and Taverkere,  Prakash~K. and Simmons, III, Howard E.},
+  title = {Process for manufacture of imidazoles},
+  year = {2001},
+  type = {patentus},
+  holder = {{E.~I. DuPont}},
+  number = {6177575}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{pm1981opa}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@patent{pm1981opa,
+  author = {{Phillipp Morris Inc.}},
+  title = {Optical perforating apparatus and system},
+  origdate = {1981-01-07},
+  date = {1985-05-15},
+  type = {patenteu},
+  number = {EP0021165}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{hideki1992qmc}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@patent{hideki1992qmc,
+  author = {U. Hideki},
+  title = {Quadrature Modulation Circuit},
+  type = {patentjp},
+  number = {152932/92},
+  date = {1992-05-20}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Standards}
+
+There are no examples of technical standards in the \emph{Oxford Guide
+to Style} or \emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
 
-\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, (Type, Institution).}
+The particular quirk with standards entries is that the number is promoted to
+the head of the reference if an author is not specified (or \key{useauthor} is
+\val{false}). If this happens, the number is copied to \code{sortkey} so the
+entry appears in the right place in the reference list, unless you get there
+first with your own value of \code{sortkey}. You may want to do this if, for
+example, you want \enquote{ISO 1000} to come after \enquote{ISO 999}.
+
+\tip{You are encouraged to put the standards body in \code{organization}, but
+  you can use \code{publisher} instead.}
+
+\tip{The examples don't demonstrate it, but you can use the \code{version} field
+  for the version of the standard.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{bs5605:1990}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@standard{bs5605:1990,
+  sortyear = {1990},
+  title = {Recommendations for citing and referencing published material},
+  number = {BS~5605:1990},
+  organization = {British Standards Institute}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{egcite}{}
+\cite{bs5605:1990}
+\end{egcite}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{w3c2017html5.2}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@standard{w3c2017html5.2,
+  title = {{HTML} 5.2},
+  editor = {Steve Faulkner and Arron Eicholz and Travis Leithead and
+    Alex Danilo and Sangwhan Moon},
+  date = {2017-12-14},
+  type = {W3C Recommendation},
+  organization = {World Wide Web Consortium},
+  url = {https://www.w3.org/TR/html52/},
+  urldate = {2018-02-17}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ietf.rfc1155}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@standard{ietf.rfc1155,
+  author = {M. T. Rose and K. McCloghrie},
+  title = {Structure and identification of management information for {TCP/IP}-based internets},
+  date = {1990-05},
+  organization = {Internet Engineering Task Force},
+  series = {Request for Comments},
+  type = {Internet Standard},
+  number = {RFC~1155/STD~16},
+  doi = {10.17487/RFC1155}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
 
 \chapter{Audiovisual materials}\label{sec:audiovideo}
-\chapterprecis{audio, inaudio, image, movie, music, inmusic, video}
+\chapterprecis{artwork, audio, inaudio, image, movie, music, inmusic, performance, video}
 
 There are typically many contributors to an audiovisual work, and the priority given to each role is fluid. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} uses \code{author} for contributors that should go at the head of the reference, and \code{editor} for others. As well as the normal ones you can use the author\slash editor types \code{performer}, \code{conductor}, \code{director} and \code{reader}.
 
@@ -2906,7 +3209,7 @@ Chaplin, C. (1936) (dir.), \emph{Modern Times} (United Artists).
 
 \tip{You can place up to four credits in the editor position, more if any of them correspond to the built-in editor types like \texttt{commentator} or \texttt{translator}.
   If you do supply a lot of credits, the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} recommends you shift them to the end of the reference.
-  You can do this with the \texttt{endeditor} option.}
+  You can do this with the \key{endeditor} option.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <OGS \S15.14.2\textdagger>
@@ -2989,7 +3292,7 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prints all information about the transmission,
 
 \spec{\enquote{EpisodeTitle} (Year), \emph{SeriesTitle}, \lit{Episode} EpisodeNumber, Channel, Day Month.}
 
-\tip{If the episode has a true title, the episide descriptor (e.g. ‘Episode 1’) goes in the \code{note} field.
+\tip{If the episode has a true title, the episide descriptor (e.g. \enquote{Episode 1}) goes in the \code{note} field.
   If it doesn't, the episode descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to remove the quote marks.
   Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the episode descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
 
@@ -3097,9 +3400,14 @@ Yousafzai, M. (2013), \enquote{Making a Wish for Action on Global Education: Mal
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\section{Images}
+\section{Images and works of art}
 
-\tip{If desired, use \code{titleaddon} to specify the type of image.}
+\tip{If you need the type of image or arrtwork to appear in square brackets,
+  put it in \code{titleaddon}. Otherwise, put it in \code{type}.}
+
+\tip{Use \code{institution} (a list) or \code{venue} (a literal) for the
+  organization, museum, gallery or building physically hosting the image, and
+  \code{location} for where it is.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
@@ -3111,12 +3419,14 @@ Clarke, M. (n.d.), \enquote{Exports of Coal to the IFS} [poster], Manchester Art
   author = {M. Clarke},
   title = {Exports of Coal to the IFS},
   titleaddon = {poster},
-  organization = {Manchester Art Gallery},
+  institution = {Manchester Art Gallery},
   url = {http://www.machestergalleries.org/the-collections/search-the-collection/display.php?EMUSESSID=70bd7f1a388d79a82f52ea9aae713ef2&irn=4128},
   urldate = {2013-11-05}}
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\tip{Use \code{organization} for the website or online location of the image.}
+
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
 {ibwNDcgs}
@@ -3125,18 +3435,130 @@ Clarke, M. (n.d.), \enquote{Exports of Coal to the IFS} [poster], Manchester Art
 \begin{Verbatim}
 @image{ibwNDcgs,
   title = {Christ the Good Shepherd},
-  note = {stained glass window, Church of St Erfyl, Llanerfyl, Powys},
+  type = {stained glass window},
+  venue = {Church of St Erfyl},
+  location = {Llanerfyl, Powys},
   organization = {Imaging the Bible in Wales Database},
   url = {http://imagingthebible.llgc.org.uk/object/1884},
   urldate = {2013-11-10}}
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{davinci1480mr}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@artwork{davinci1480mr,
+  author = {given=Leonardo, family=da Vinci},
+  title = {Madonna of the Rocks},
+  type = {oil on canvas},
+  note = {78 x 48.5 in\adddot},
+  year = {1480s},
+  date+an = {=inferred},
+  institution = {Louvre},
+  location = {Paris}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{gormley1998an}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@artwork{gormley1998an,
+  author = {Anthony Gormley},
+  title = {Angel of the {North}},
+  date = {1998},
+  type = {sculpture},
+  location = {Low Fell, Gateshead}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{rodin1882k}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@artwork{rodin1882k,
+  author = {Auguste Rodin},
+  title = {The Kiss},
+  date = {1882},
+  type = {marble},
+  institution = {Musée Rodin},
+  location = {Paris}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Performances}
+
+\tip{Use \code{origdate} for the date when the play, ballet, opera, or whatever
+  was written or premièred, and \code{date} for the date of the performance you
+  are referencing. You can specify what these dates signify with the
+  (non-standard) \code{origdatetype} and \code{datetype} fields. You can also
+  use \code{eventdate} in place of \code{date}, but then you won't be able to
+  specify the type.}
+
+\tip{As for recordings, you can use the \code{author} and \code{editor} fields
+  to provide various credits. As for artworks, use \code{venue} and
+  \code{location} for where the performance occurred, and \code{organization}
+  for a website or organization hosting a recording of the performance online.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ashton1937wb}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@performance{ashton1937wb,
+  author = {Frederick Ashton},
+  origdate = {1937},
+  title = {A Wedding Bouquet},
+  venue = {Royal Opera House},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {2004-10-22}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{lord2007dc}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@performance{lord2007dc,
+  author = {Jon Lord},
+  date = {2007-10-20},
+  title = {Durham Concerto},
+  editor = {{Liverpool Philharmonic Orchestra}},
+  editortype = {performer},
+  editora = {Mischa Damev},
+  editoratype = {conductor},
+  venue = {Durham Cathedral},
+  location = {Durham}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{judge1995mnd}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@performance{judge1995mnd,
+  options = {useauthor=false,useeditor=false},
+  author = {William Shakespeare},
+  title = {A Midsummer Night's Dream},
+  editor = {Ian Judge},
+  editortype = {director},
+  date = {1995-02-26},
+  venue = {Theatre Royal},
+  location = {Newcastle upon Tyne}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
 \chapter{Digital media}\label{sec:electronic}
 \chapterprecis{online, software, dataset}
 
 In Section 18.8.5 of \emph{New Hart's Rules}, some publication dates are printed in parentheses and some are left bare.
-In theory, the difference should be that parentheses indicate ‘proper’ publication (bare dates are when the resource was created or issued). In practice, it seems to be random. I have therefore decided to ignore the variation and leave all such dates in parentheses.
+In theory, the difference should be that parentheses indicate \enquote{proper} publication (bare dates are when the resource was created or issued). In practice, it seems to be random. I have therefore decided to ignore the variation and leave all such dates in parentheses.
 
 \section{Website articles}
 
@@ -3248,14 +3670,14 @@ McEwen, S. (2013), \enquote{Tan Twan Eng Interview: \enquote{I Have No Alternati
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\tip{Unlike standard \textsf{biblatex}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} supports \code{maintitle} for online entries and prints the result in italics. For more portability, you could either hard-code the italics into the \code{organization} field or use the \code{article} entry type.}
+
 \info{It is not made explicit why \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} is in italics and \emph{Wikipedia} is not.
   It might be historical or customary, because \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} was established as a print publication and \emph{Wikipedia} has only been online;
   it might be because \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} is a Latin title;
   it might reflect an opinion on the two resources;
   or it may just be illustrative of variant practice.}
 
-\tip{Unlike standard \textsf{biblatex}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} supports \code{maintitle} for online entries and prints the result in italics. For more portability, you could either hard-code the italics into the \code{organization} field or use the \code{article} entry type.}
-
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
 {wp2013oup}
@@ -3325,7 +3747,7 @@ Shakespeare's Globe (2013), \enquote{On this day in 1611 first production of The
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\tip{If it feels odd putting the entire content of a tweet in your reference, \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using a descriptor like ‘Twitter post’ instead of the title. As described in \cref{sec:broadcasts}, you can do this either by annotating the title field with the keyword \code{descriptor} or by using the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field in place of \code{title}.}
+\tip{If it feels odd putting the entire content of a tweet in your reference, \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using a descriptor like \enquote{Twitter post} instead of the title. As described in \cref{sec:broadcasts}, you can do this either by annotating the title field with the keyword \code{descriptor} or by using the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field in place of \code{title}.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 {oup2015tweet}
@@ -3447,7 +3869,7 @@ Use the \code{jurisdiction} entry type for citing cases.
 
 \tip{Several additional pagination types are defined for use with legal citations:
   \val{article}, \val{clause}, \val{regulation}, and \val{rule} all work as normal.
-  The default is a bare number (\val{none}), indicating a page reference, though EU and ECHR cases default to using the ‘para’ (\val{paragraph}) prefix.
+  The default is a bare number (\val{none}), indicating a page reference, though EU and ECHR cases default to using the \enquote{para} (\val{paragraph}) prefix.
   There is also an alternative pagination type for paragraphs, \val{[]}, which prints the number in square brackets instead of giving it a prefix.
 }
 
@@ -3537,6 +3959,8 @@ Use the \code{jurisdiction} entry type for citing cases.
 \parencite[13]{rvg2004}
 \end{egcite}
 
+\hack{Note that in the cases above and below, the head of the reference won't match the citation, which may cause confusion. You may wish to hack the in-text citation to fix this.}
+
 \tip{If a report is published a long time after the decision, you can put the decision date in \code{origdate} to clarify the situation.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
@@ -3660,7 +4084,7 @@ Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} are inconsiste
   The \key{ecli} option determines under what circumstances the identifier is printed.}
 
 \tip{European cases still get sorted by title, even if the entry begins with the case number.
-  Use \code{sorttitle} if you would rather they were sorted under ‘Case’ or ‘Joined Cases’.}
+  Use \code{sorttitle} if you would rather they were sorted under \enquote{Case} or \enquote{Joined Cases}.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <OGS \S13.4.4>
@@ -3680,7 +4104,7 @@ Case C–118/07 \emph{Commission of the European Communities v Finland} [2002] E
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\tip{Indicate Commission Decisions by putting \code{commission} in the \code{institution} field. If a decision has a formal decision number, put this in the \code{number} field. Put the case number (including the word ‘Case’ if needed) in either the \code{titleaddon}, \code{parvolume}, or \code{userb} field.}
+\tip{Indicate Commission Decisions by putting \code{commission} in the \code{institution} field. If a decision has a formal decision number, put this in the \code{number} field. Put the case number (including the word \enquote{Case} if needed) in either the \code{titleaddon}, \code{parvolume}, or \code{userb} field.}
 
 \tip{An unfortunate side effect of this is that is not possible to use either the parallel or neutral citation idiom to get a reference to look like the following. In such cases, use the \code{note} field to provide the second citation.}
 
@@ -3928,7 +4352,7 @@ Convention Relating to the Status of Refugees (adopted 28 July 1951, entered int
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\tip{Since the lack of a \code{date} field may cause an inaccurate ‘n.d.’ label to be printed, use the \code{shorthand} field to provide a sensible citation label. You could use \cs{citetitle} the first time to ensure the reader can find it in the bibliography.}
+\tip{Since the lack of a \code{date} field may cause an inaccurate \enquote{n.d.\@} label to be printed, use the \code{shorthand} field to provide a sensible citation label. You could use \cs{citetitle} the first time to ensure the reader can find it in the bibliography. You can also suppress the \enquote{n.d.\@} label by specifying \code{sortyear} or using the \key{nonodate} option.}
 
 \begin{egcite}{(Refugee Convention: art.\@ 24)}
   \parencite[24]{refugees}
@@ -4008,7 +4432,7 @@ Law Commission (2009), \emph{Intoxication and Criminal Liability} (Law Comm No 3
 it provides the \code{commentary} entry type simply as an alias for \code{book}.
 
 \chapter{Specialist materials}\label{sec:special}
-\chapterprecis{misc, unpublished, letter}
+\chapterprecis{misc, unpublished, letter, manuscript}
 
 \section{Poems}\label{sec:poem}
 
@@ -4125,7 +4549,7 @@ Play titles, like those of epic poems, are set in italics rather than quoted.
 An author–date system like \textsf{oxyear} does not really lend itself to manuscript references,
 but support is provided anyway for the sake of completeness.
 
-\spec{Author, Title/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.}
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.}
 
 With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can enter manuscripts in either of two ways. The first uses the \code{unpublished} entry type.
 
@@ -4144,7 +4568,7 @@ With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can enter manuscripts in either of two ways. The
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR 18.6.3*\textdagger>
 {smithMS23116}
-Smith, F. [1912–7], travel diaries, British Library, Add. MS 23116.
+Smith, F. (1912–7), travel diaries, British Library, Add. MS 23116.
 \tcblower
 \begin{Verbatim}
 @unpublished{smithMS23116,
@@ -4179,7 +4603,7 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR 18.6.2\textdagger>
 {chaundlerMS288}
-Chaundler, T. [n.d.], \enquote{Collocutiones}, Balliol College, Oxford, MS288.
+Chaundler, T. (n.d.), \enquote{Collocutiones}, Balliol College, Oxford, MS288.
 \tcblower
 \begin{Verbatim}
 @manuscript{chaundlerMS288,
@@ -4194,7 +4618,7 @@ Chaundler, T. [n.d.], \enquote{Collocutiones}, Balliol College, Oxford, MS288.
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR 18.6.2\textdagger>
 {exchequerE311}
-exchequer accounts [1798], Dec., Cheshire Record Office, E311.
+exchequer accounts (1798), Dec., Cheshire Record Office, E311.
 \tcblower
 \begin{Verbatim}
 @manuscript{exchequerE311,
@@ -4208,7 +4632,7 @@ exchequer accounts [1798], Dec., Cheshire Record Office, E311.
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR 18.6.3\textdagger>
 {blcBOX19d}
-Bearsden Ladies' Club minutes [1949], 12 June, Bearsden and Milngavie District Libraries, box 19/d.
+Bearsden Ladies' Club minutes (1949), 12 June, Bearsden and Milngavie District Libraries, box 19/d.
 \tcblower
 \begin{Verbatim}
 @manuscript{blcBOX19d,
@@ -4223,7 +4647,7 @@ Bearsden Ladies' Club minutes [1949], 12 June, Bearsden and Milngavie District L
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <NHR 18.6.5\textdagger>
 {bodMSrawl-d520}
-Bodleian Library [n.d.], Oxford, MS Rawlinson D. 520, fo. 7.
+Bodleian Library (n.d.), Oxford, MS Rawlinson D. 520, fo. 7.
 \tcblower
 \begin{Verbatim}
 @manuscript{bodMSrawl-d520,
@@ -4262,6 +4686,52 @@ Bodleian Library [n.d.], Oxford, MS Rawlinson D. 520, fo. 7.
   bodMSrawl-d520}
 \end{egcite}
 
+\section{Letters}
+
+These examples relate to letters held personally or online. For letters that
+form part of archival collections, see the section on manuscripts above.
+
+Note that it is usually acceptable to exclude personal communications from
+the reference section, and simply cite them in the text (in which case you may
+not need the \pkg{biblatex} machinery).
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}/Descriptor, Date.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.11.1*\textdagger>
+{anon2001pl}
+Personal letter to the author (2001), 2 May.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@letter{anon2001pl,
+  title = {Personal letter to the author},
+  title+an = {=descriptor},
+  date = {2001-05-02}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+In the absence of any explicit rationale governing whether the date is
+parenthetical, in \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} the presence of a URL
+will trigger the use of parentheses.
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}/Descriptor [HowPublished], (Date), OnlineAccess.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.15.3*\textdagger>
+{ritter2001rp}%
+Ritter, R. M. (2001), \enquote{Revised proofs} [email to H. E. Cox], (1 Aug.\@), \url{ogs@ritter.org.uk}, accessed 3 Aug.\@ 2001.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+@letter{ritter2001rp,
+  author = {R. M. Ritter},
+  title = {Revised proofs},
+  howpublished = {email to H. E. Cox},
+  date = {2001-08-01},
+  url = {ogs@ritter.org.uk},
+  urldate = {2001-08-03}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
 \printbibliography[notcategory=hidden]
 \end{document}
 %% 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.dtx
index 137530df88a..eb2bf8d58a2 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.dtx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 % \iffalse
 %<*internal|bbx|cbx|dbx|lbx|doc>
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
 %</internal|bbx|cbx|dbx|lbx|doc>
 %<*internal>
 \iffalse
@@ -102,7 +102,8 @@ the styles handle certain tricky references are subject to change.
 %</readme>
 %<*bib>
 @reference{ritter2002ogs,
-  author = {R. M. Ritter},
+  editor = {R. M. Ritter},
+  editortype= {editorcm},
   title = {The {Oxford} Guide to Style},
   date = {2002},
   publisher = {Oxford University Press},
@@ -328,17 +329,21 @@ Copyright (C) 2016–2018 Alex Ball
 %     \finentrypunct
 %   }{}%
 % }{}{}
-%<*doc&(m|a)>
+%<*doc>
 % Shorthands useful for oxyear make overlong labels for oxnum/oxalph,
 % so we remove them.
 \DeclareSourcemap{%
   \maps[datatype=bibtex]{%
     \map[overwrite=true]{%
+%<a>      \pertype{legislation}
+%<a>      \pertype{legal}
+%<n|y>      \pernottype{legslation}
+%<n|y>      \pernottype{legal}
       \step[fieldset=shorthand, null=true]
     }%
   }%
 }
-%</doc&(m|a)>
+%</doc>
 
 \hypersetup{pdfborder={0 0 0},pdfencoding=auto}
 \usepackage[noabbrev,capitalize,nameinlink]{cleveref}
@@ -813,29 +818,29 @@ The style is self-contained, so you can load it with \pkg{biblatex}:
 
 The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
 
-\begin{docKey}{altthesis}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
-  Puts the thesis type inside, rather than outside, the parenthetical publication block.
-\end{docKey}
-
 \begin{docKey}{anon}{=\val{literal}|\val{long}|\val{short}}{default \val{short}, initially \val{literal}}
   Affects what happens if the author name matches the value of \cs{oxrefanon}.
-  By default, this is ‘Anonymous’, but you could change it a different word (such as ‘Anonimo’) instead.
+  By default, this is \enquote{Anonymous}, but you could change it a different word (such as \enquote{Anonimo}) instead.
   \begin{itemize}
   \item\docValue{literal}
     means no special handling is used.
   \item\docValue{long}
-    will print the unabbreviated localization string \code{anon} (‘Anonymous’) instead of the author name
+    will print the unabbreviated localization string \code{anon} (\enquote{Anonymous}) instead of the author name
 %<y>    in citations and the bibliography.
 %<m|a>    in the bibliography.
 %<n>    in the bibliography, but neither are printed in citations.
   \item\docValue{short}
-    will print the abbreviated localization string \code{anon} (‘Anon.\@’) instead of the author name
+    will print the abbreviated localization string \code{anon} (\enquote{Anon.\@}) instead of the author name
 %<y>    in citations and the bibliography.
 %<m|a>    in the bibliography.
 %<n>    in the bibliography, but neither are printed in citations.
   \end{itemize}
 \end{docKey}
 
+\begin{docKey}{bookseries}{=\val{in}|\val{out}}{default \val{in}, initially \val{in}}
+  Puts the series information for a book \docValue{in}side or \docValue{out}side the parenthetical publication block.
+\end{docKey}
+
 \begin{docKey}{court-plain}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
   Prints courts of decision without parentheses.
 \end{docKey}
@@ -860,35 +865,47 @@ The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
   Surrounds URLs with angle brackets.
 \end{docKey}
 
+\begin{docKey}{issuedate-plain}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
+  Removes the parentheses around the date of a periodical without a volume number.
+  This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
+  (This option was previously called \key{varissuedate}.)
+\end{docKey}
+
 \begin{docKey}{issuestyle}{=\val{slash}|\val{colon}|\val{comma}|\val{parens}}{default \val{slash}, initially \val{slash}}
   Affects how journal volumes and numbers are printed.
   \begin{itemize}
   \item\docValue{slash}
-    separates the two with a solidus, e.g. ‘23/2’.
+    separates the two with a solidus, e.g. \enquote{23/2}.
   \item\docValue{colon}
-    separates the two with a colon and space, e.g. ‘23: 2’.
+    separates the two with a colon and space, e.g. \enquote{23: 2}.
 %<a|y>    It is intended for use with \textsf{oxnotes}\slash\textsf{oxnum} and not recommended for this style.
   \item\docValue{comma}
-    separates the two with a comma and space, e.g. ‘23, 2’.
+    separates the two with a comma and space, e.g. \enquote{23, 2}.
   \item\docValue{parens}
-    sets off the issue number in parentheses, e.g. ‘23 (2)’.
+    sets off the issue number in parentheses, e.g. \enquote{23 (2)}.
 %<n|m>    It is intended for use with \textsf{oxalph}\slash\textsf{oxyear} and not recommended for this style.
   \end{itemize}
 \end{docKey}
 
 %<*a|y>
 \begin{docKey}{mergedate}{=\val{maximum}|\val{compact}|\val{basic}|\val{minimum}|\val{year}|\val{false}}{default \val{year}, initially \val{year}}
-  Affects how the date at the start of the references relates to the date in the ‘normal’ position.
+  Affects how the date at the start of the references relates to the date in the \enquote{normal} position.
   The default value of \val{year} is intended for use with the default setting of \key{labeldate}\texttt{=}\val{year}.
-  If you set \key{labeldate} to something else, you will probably want to set this option to \val{compact} or \val{maximum}.
+  If you set \key{labeldate} to something else, you will probably want to set this option to \val{compact} or \val{maximum}. It can also be set on a per-type basis.
 \end{docKey}
 %</a|y>
 
 \begin{docKey}{nolocation}{}{no value, initially unset}
-  Replaces missing locations with ‘n.p.’ or the localized equivalent in books, collections, reference works, proceedings, and similar entry types. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
+  Replaces missing locations with \enquote{n.p.} or the localized equivalent in books, collections, reference works, proceedings, and similar entry types. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
   Alternatively, it may be set on a per-entry basis.
 \end{docKey}
 
+%<*a|y>
+\begin{docKey}{nonodate}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
+  Suppresses the printing of the \code{nodate} localization string when an entry is missing a recognizable date. It can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis. It is automatically set to \val{true} for entries with a \code{sortyear}, on the assumption that the date has been given in a non-date field (e.g.\@ the number of a standard).
+\end{docKey}
+%</a|y>
+
 \begin{docKey}{nopublisher}{}{no value, initially unset}
   Removes publisher name from all entries. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
 \end{docKey}
@@ -907,6 +924,11 @@ The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
 \end{docKey}
 %</n|m>
 
+\begin{docKey}{thesis}{=\val{in}|\val{out}|\val{plain}}{default \val{out}, initially \val{out}}
+  Puts the thesis type \docValue{in}side or \docValue{out}side the parenthetical publication block,
+  while \docValue{plain} removes the parentheses entirely.
+\end{docKey}
+
 \begin{docKey}{timefirst}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
   Prints the time (if provided) before the date instead of after it.
   This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
@@ -918,11 +940,6 @@ The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
   This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
 \end{docKey}
 
-\begin{docKey}{varissuedate}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
-  Removes the parentheses around the date of a periodical without a volume number.
-  This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
-\end{docKey}
-
 \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} makes use of Biber-specific techniques to solve some of the challenges presented by Oxford style.
 It will not stop you from using Bib\TeX\ instead but, if you do, only simple and standard entries will work.
 In particular, manuscripts, legal references and anything involving related entries will be adversely affected.
@@ -959,7 +976,7 @@ Examples that follow standard \textsf{biblatex} semantics, and are therefore
   Code used in bibliography file.
 \end{tcolorbox}
 
-Examples that have been ‘hacked’ in some way, and are therefore not portable
+Examples that have been \enquote{hacked} in some way, and are therefore not portable
 to other styles, are in amber:
 
 \begin{tcolorbox}%
@@ -1033,35 +1050,17 @@ but by no means all of them will be supported.
 For information on installing the styles, and for the documented source code,
 see the separate documentation file \href{./oxref.pdf}{\texttt{oxref.pdf}}
 
-\section{To do}
+\section{Stability}
 
 The \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} family of styles is currently at \fileversion.
-As mentioned above, what the styles \emph{should} be doing is open to some
-interpretation, so at the moment I am open to the idea of changing how the
-styles handle cases not covered by the two style manuals. Please leave your
-thoughts on the GitHub issue tracker.\footnote{\url{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}}
-At some point version 1.0 will be released, after which the default (expected)
-behaviour of the styles will be fixed, though alternative behaviour may be added.
-
-I do not have any examples to work from for the following entry types, so they
-are currently untested. If you have strong feelings about how they should be
-rendered in Oxford style and can provide me with a sample reference or several,
-I would be most glad to hear from you:
-
-\begin{multicols}{3}
-  \begin{itemize}\firmlist
-    \item suppbook
-    \item booklet
-    \item suppcollection
-    \item patent
-    \item suppperiodical
-    \item artwork
-    \item commentary
-    \item letter
-    \item performance
-    \item standard
-  \end{itemize}
-\end{multicols}
+I have no further features planned, so unless there is popular demand otherwise,
+it should be bug-fix releases only between now and the release of version 1.0.
+When that happens, the default (expected) behaviour of the styles will be frozen,
+meaning I will do my best to avoid backwards-incompatible changes, though
+alternative behaviour may be added. If you spot any aspects of the styles that
+could be improved before then, especially for the cases not covered by the two
+style manuals, please leave your thoughts on the GitHub issue tracker.%
+\footnote{\url{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}}
 
 You are of course encouraged to report any bugs you discover on the
 \href{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}{GitHub issue tracker}
@@ -1129,7 +1128,7 @@ Test\footcite[49-50]{faith1997epg}
 \end{egcite}
 \addtocategory{hidden}{cobban}
 
-Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} describe an alternative system that uses the abbreviations ‘ibid.\@’, ‘op.\@ cit.\@’, ‘loc.\@ cit.\@’, and ‘id.\@’ and friends, though with underwhelming enthusiasm. If you would like to use these abbreviations, load the \textsf{verbose-trad1} citation scheme instead (and remember to use the \code{gender} field):
+Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} describe an alternative system that uses the abbreviations \enquote{ibid.\@}, \enquote{op.\@ cit.\@}, \enquote{loc.\@ cit.\@}, and \enquote{id.\@} and friends, though with underwhelming enthusiasm. If you would like to use these abbreviations, load the \textsf{verbose-trad1} citation scheme instead (and remember to use the \code{gender} field):
 
 \begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
 \usepackage[bibstyle=oxnotes,citestyle=verbose-trad1]{biblatex}
@@ -1139,7 +1138,9 @@ Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} describe an al
 %<*m|a>
 Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} describe a system that uses simple numbers as citation labels, almost as if they were endnotes. This system does not support page references, unlike the citation labels familiar to \LaTeX\ users. In the absence of a better idea, therefore, this style treats citation labels rather like author–year parenthetical citations and adopts the conventions from \textsf{oxyear}. Pages are set off with a colon, and multiple works are separated with a semicolon.
 
-\begin{egcite}{}
+\begin{egcite}%
+%<m>{Test [\citefield{hankinson1988mmm}{labelnumber}: 93, 96; \citefield{hankinson1989gba}{labelnumber}: 72]}
+%<a>{Test [\citefield{hankinson1988mmm}{labelalpha}: 93, 96; \citefield{hankinson1989gba}{labelalpha}: 72]}
 Test \parencites%
   [93, 96]{hankinson1988mmm}%
   [72]{hankinson1989gba}
@@ -1163,7 +1164,7 @@ Pages are set off with a colon, and multiple works are separated with a semicolo
   [72]{hankinson1989gba}
 \end{egcite}
 
-Up to two author names are given, after which ‘et al.’ is used.
+Up to two author names are given, after which \enquote{et al.} is used.
 
 \begin{egcite}{(Barnes and Griffin 1989; Brady et al. 1994)}
 \parencite{barnes.griffin1989pte,%
@@ -1201,17 +1202,17 @@ If a short author label is provided, it is used in place of the full author.
 \emph{New Hart's Rules} is mostly consistent with this, but has some variations where the author and date are separated by a comma, and where multiple references are also separated by commas.
 %</y>
 
-\section{Missing and inferred attribution}
+\section{Missing or inferred attribution}
 
 \subsection{Missing attribution}
 %<*n>
-Where works have no attribution, both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggest printing them without further adornment in notes, but listing them under ‘Anonymous’ (or ‘Anon.\@’ in the latter case) in the bibliography.
+Where works have no attribution, both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggest printing them without further adornment in notes, but listing them under \enquote{Anonymous} (or \enquote{Anon.\@} in the latter case) in the bibliography.
 %</n>
 %<*y>
-The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prefers anonymous works to have ‘Anonymous’ in place of the author name, while \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using ‘Anon.\@’ or a short title.
+The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prefers anonymous works to have \enquote{Anonymous} in place of the author name, while \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using \enquote{Anon.\@} or a short title.
 %</y>
 
-\tip{\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will not automatically generate anonymous labels for you, but if you use the \key{anon} option (see \cref{sec:loading}), you can transform an author name of ‘Anonymous’ (or whatever \cs{oxrefanon} is set to) in your .bib file to either the long or short localization string \code{anon}.
+\tip{\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will not automatically generate anonymous labels for you, but if you use the \key{anon} option (see \cref{sec:loading}), you can transform an author name of \enquote{Anonymous} (or whatever \cs{oxrefanon} is set to) in your .bib file to either the long or short localization string \code{anon}.
 %<n>  Doing this will automatically suppress the printing of the anonymous author in notes.
 }
 
@@ -1277,8 +1278,8 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prefers anonymous works to have ‘Anonymous’
 
 \subsection{Pseudepigraphy}
 Some older works are known to have been written pseudepigraphically, that is, falsely attributed to a more famous author. The way of indicating this in Oxford style, if desired, is
-%<n>to add the prefix ‘Pseudo-’ before the name in notes, and
-to put ‘(Ps.-)’ after the name in the bibliography.
+%<n>to add the prefix \enquote{Pseudo-} before the name in notes, and
+to put \enquote{(Ps.-)} after the name in the bibliography.
 
 \tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the name with the keyword \code{pseudo}.
 %<n>Since this mechanism is aimed at ancient texts, it has only been designed to work with single-part names
@@ -1350,7 +1351,7 @@ Oxford style is to give the attribution in square brackets.
 \tip{You can also use the syntax from \textsf{biblatex-realauthor}.
   If you do not specify the \code{author}, then \code{realauthor} is treated as an alias for \code{author} annotated with the keyword \code{inferred}.
   The equivalent is true for \code{realeditor}.
-  Note, however, that \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not recognize the \code{userealauthor} and \code{userealeditor} options.}
+  Note, however, that \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not recognize the \key{userealauthor} and \key{userealeditor} options.}
 
 \subsection{Pseudonyms}
 
@@ -1507,7 +1508,7 @@ If the contribution of the translators or revisers is so great they could be joi
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\tip{Annotate \emph{either} the \code{editor} \emph{or} \code{translator} field with the keyword \code{jointauthor} to promote the name to the joint author position (you cannot do it for both). Note that you have to supply a suitable \code{shortauthor} value yourself; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not calculate it for you.}
+\tip{Annotate \emph{either} the \code{editor} \emph{or} \code{translator} field with the keyword \code{jointauthor} to promote the name to the joint author position (you cannot do it for both). Internally, what this does is move the names to the \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}-specific \code{jointauthor} field; you can use this and \code{jointauthortype} directly if you like, at the cost of portability to other styles. Note that you have to supply a suitable \code{shortauthor} value yourself; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not calculate it for you.}
 
 \section{Titular prefixes}\label{sec:nametitles}
 
@@ -1675,10 +1676,10 @@ Conversely, it might be helpful to provide the English original of a translated
 
 For periodicals, grey literature, audiovisual and online material, the lack of a place of publication is not surprising; indeed it may be expected. For books, however, it may be remarkable and deserve marking in the bibliography with \enquote{n.p.\@} (for \enquote{no place}).
 
-\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for books, collections, reference works, proceedings and similar entry types, use the \code{nolocation} bibliography option.}
+\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for books, collections, reference works, proceedings and similar entry types, use the \key{nolocation} bibliography option.}
 
-\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for only a specific entry, use the \code{nolocation} entry option instead.
-  This has the feature of hiding the \enquote{n.p.\@} from other styles that do not follow the same convention.}
+\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for only a specific entry, use the \key{nolocation} entry option instead.
+  The advantage of doing this over simply giving \enquote{n.p.\@} as the publisher is that it hides it from other styles that do not follow the same convention.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 %<n|m><NHR \S18.2.9>
@@ -1699,6 +1700,26 @@ For periodicals, grey literature, audiovisual and online material, the lack of a
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\section{Missing or inferred date of publication}
+
+If the date is missing from a work, you can sometimes make an educated guess
+what it should be. It is usual practice to enclose such guesses in square
+brackets.
+
+\tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the
+  \code{date}, \code{origdate}, or \code{eventdate} field with the keyword
+  \code{inferred}.}
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+  date+an = {=inferred},
+\end{tcblisting}
+%<*a|y>
+
+Otherwise, if you don't supply a suitable date, it will be replaced with the
+localization string \code{nodate}. If you don't want this behaviour, you can
+suppress it with the \key{nonodate} option, which can be set globally or on a
+per-type or per-entry basis.
+%</a|y>
 
 \chapter{Articles and periodicals}\label{sec:article}
 \chapterprecis{article, periodical, suppperiodical, review}
@@ -1706,7 +1727,7 @@ For periodicals, grey literature, audiovisual and online material, the lack of a
 
 \section{Articles in periodicals with volumes/numbers}
 
-The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} consistently prefers volume and part numbers to be written like \enquote{23/2}, but also discusses formats such as \enquote{23: 2} and \enquote{23 (2)}. \emph{New Hart's Rules} adds \enquote{23, 2} as a further possibility. The latter two are better suited to \textsf{oxyear} which uses a colon to demarcate the page numbers. These variations are implemented as the option \textsf{issuestyle}; see \autoref{sec:loading} for details.
+The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} consistently prefers volume and part numbers to be written like \enquote{23/2}, but also discusses formats such as \enquote{23: 2} and \enquote{23 (2)}. \emph{New Hart's Rules} adds \enquote{23, 2} as a further possibility. The latter two are better suited to \textsf{oxalph}\slash\textsf{oxyear} which use a colon to demarcate the page numbers. These variations are implemented as the option \key{issuestyle}; see \autoref{sec:loading} for details.
 
 %<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Year), Pages.}
 %<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number: Pages.}
@@ -1851,11 +1872,11 @@ Unwin, T. (1994), \enquote{Structural Change in Estonian Agriculture: From Comma
 
 % Electronic identifier instead of a page range
 \begin{bibexbox}(hacked)
-%<n><NHR \S18.8.5*>
-%<y><NHR \S18.8.5*\textdagger>
+%<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5*>
+%<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5*\textdagger>
 {li.etal2013flh}
-%<n>Shu Li et al., \enquote{Forever Love: The Hitherto Earliest Record of Copulating Insects from the Middle Jurassic of China}, \emph{PLoS ONE}, 8/11 (2013), e78188. doi: \path{10.1371/journal.pone.0078188}
-%<y>Li, S. et al. (2013), \enquote{Forever Love: The Hitherto Earliest Record of Copulating Insects from the Middle Jurassic of China}, \emph{PLoS ONE}, 8/11, e78188. doi: \path{10.1371/journal.pone.0078188}
+%<n|m>Shu Li et al., \enquote{Forever Love: The Hitherto Earliest Record of Copulating Insects from the Middle Jurassic of China}, \emph{PLoS ONE}, 8/11 (2013), e78188. doi: \path{10.1371/journal.pone.0078188}
+%<a|y>Li, S. et al. (2013), \enquote{Forever Love: The Hitherto Earliest Record of Copulating Insects from the Middle Jurassic of China}, \emph{PLoS ONE}, 8/11, e78188. doi: \path{10.1371/journal.pone.0078188}
 \tcblower
 \begin{Verbatim}
 %</n|m|a|y>
@@ -2205,7 +2226,7 @@ or add the book details to a periodical entry.
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\tip{Use \code{bookpagination} to force the display of ‘pp.’ (since the number format is odd), and \cs{DeclareNumChars*}\brackets{S} to ensure that \code{S61} is recognized as a number.}%
+\tip{Use \code{bookpagination} to force the display of \enquote{pp.} (since the number format is odd), and \cs{DeclareNumChars*}\brackets{S} to ensure that \code{S61} is recognized as a number.}%
 
 
 \section{Articles that span multiple issues}
@@ -2266,12 +2287,58 @@ Stookey, R. W. (1974), \enquote{Social Structure and Politics in the Yemen Arab
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\section{Editorials and other regular features}
+
+Strictly speaking, when a work is headed \enquote{Editorial} or \enquote{Letter to the Editor}
+in a periodical, this is a descriptor rather than a title.
+
+\tip{If a piece has a true title, the descriptor goes in the \code{note} field.
+  If it doesn't, the descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to remove the quote marks.
+  Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ball2015ed}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+@suppperiodical{ball2015ed,
+  author = {Alexander Ball},
+  title = {Editorial},
+  title+an = {=descriptor},
+  date = {2015},
+  journaltitle = {International Journal of Digital Curation},
+  volume = {10},
+  number = {1},
+  pages = {i-v},
+  doi = {10.2218/ijdc.v10i1.376}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{jccm2006ed}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+@suppperiodical{jccm2006ed,
+  title = {\enquote{What a Disaster} and Why Does This Question Matter?},
+  date = {2006},
+  note = {Editorial},
+  journaltitle   = {Journal of Contingencies and Crisis Management},
+  volume = {14},
+  pages = {1-2}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
 \section{Reviews}
 
 %<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{review of} ReviewedWork, \lit{in} \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Year), Pages.}
 %<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{review of} ReviewedWork, \lit{in} \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number: Pages.}
 
-\tip{To get this format, use a separate entry for the reviewed item, reference it in the ‘related’ field, and use the key ‘reviewof’ as the ‘relatedtype’.}
+\tip{To get this format, use a separate entry for the reviewed item, reference it in the \enquote{related} field, and use the key \enquote{reviewof} as the \enquote{relatedtype}.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 %<n|m><OGS \S15.4.4>
@@ -2589,7 +2656,7 @@ Hankinson, R. J. (1988) (ed.), \emph{Method, Medicine, and Metaphysics} (Edmonto
 
 Biblatex uses \code{reference} for encyclopaedias and dictionaries, which are typically made up of many small contributions by distinct authors and compiled by an editorial board whose membership might change between successive editions. From a database perspective, reference works are like collections in that they have no single author (a reference work written by a single author should use the \code{book} entry type instead).
 
-\tip{The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} considers the titles of reference works to be more important and memorable than those of the editor, and so lists the title first, but \emph{New Hart's Rules} doesn't. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} takes the former approach, but you can switch to the latter by setting the \texttt{useeditor} option back to true for this type.}
+\tip{The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} considers the titles of reference works to be more important and memorable than those of the editor, and so lists the title first, but \emph{New Hart's Rules} doesn't. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} takes the former approach, but you can switch to the latter by setting the \key{useeditor} option back to true for this type.}
 
 \begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
 \ExecuteBibliographyOptions[reference,mvreference]{useeditor=true}
@@ -3104,7 +3171,7 @@ J. D. Denniston, \emph{The Greek Particles} (1934; 2nd edn., Oxford, 1954).
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\tip{Use the localization key \code{revised} as the edition to get ‘revised edition’. Use the localization key \code{revisedenlarged} as the edition to get ‘revised and enlarged edition’}
+\tip{Use the localization key \code{revised} as the edition to get \enquote{revised edition}. Use the localization key \code{revisedenlarged} as the edition to get \enquote{revised and enlarged edition}}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.2.1*>
 {gibbon1686dfs}
@@ -3127,7 +3194,7 @@ J. D. Denniston, \emph{The Greek Particles} (1934; 2nd edn., Oxford, 1954).
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\info{In the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style}, there is no comma after ‘rev. edn.’ in the above reference; this may be an error.}
+\info{In the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style}, there is no comma after \enquote{rev. edn.} in the above reference; this may be an error.}
 %</n|m>
 %<*a|y>
 \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2>
@@ -3166,7 +3233,7 @@ rather than within the publication block%
 %<a|y>\spec{Author (OrigYear), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher).}
 
 %<n|m>\tip{This format is triggered if you specify an original date but do not specify the original publisher or location, nor the edition of the later publication.}
-%<n|m>\info{In the following example, you will see the style uses ‘originally published’ instead of ‘first published’. This is because ‘originally’ is more common among the available examples.}
+%<n|m>\info{In the following example, you will see the style uses \enquote{originally published} instead of \enquote{first published}. This is because \enquote{originally} is more common among the available examples.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 %<n|m><OGS \S15.2.3>
@@ -3192,7 +3259,7 @@ rather than within the publication block%
 \subsection{Reprints}
 
 %<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher, Year; \lit{repr.} Location: Publisher, Year).}
-%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year/Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{repr.} Location: Publisher).}
+%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year–Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{repr.} Location: Publisher).}
 
 \tip{Use localization key \code{reprint} as the edition. For a revised reprint, use \code{revisedreprint}.}
 
@@ -3241,7 +3308,7 @@ rather than within the publication block%
 \end{bibexbox}
 
 %<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher, Year; \lit{facs. edn.}, Location: Publisher, Year).}
-%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year/Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{facs. edn.}, Location: Publisher).}
+%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year–Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{facs. edn.}, Location: Publisher).}
 
 \tip{Use localization key \code{facsimile} as the edition.}
 
@@ -3797,6 +3864,13 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} suggests citing entries in dictionaries and enc
 
 \section{Supplementary works in books and collections}
 
+If the work is headed \enquote{Introduction}, \enquote{Foreword}, \enquote{Afterword}, or similar,
+this is technically a descriptor rather than a title.
+
+\tip{If the work has a true title, the descriptor goes in the \code{note} field.
+  If it doesn't, the descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to correct the formatting.
+  Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
+
 \begin{bibexbox}
 %<n|m><NHR \S18.2.6*>
 %<a|y><NHR \S18.2.6*\textdagger>
@@ -3809,6 +3883,7 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} suggests citing entries in dictionaries and enc
 @suppbook{gill1987intro,
   author = {Roma Gill},
   title = {introduction},
+  title+an = {=descriptor},
   booktitle = {The Complete Works of Christopher Marlow},
   volume = {1},
   origlocation = {Oxford},
@@ -3819,6 +3894,35 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} suggests citing entries in dictionaries and enc
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{atwan2000fw}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+@suppcollection{atwan2000fw,
+  author = {Robert Atwan},
+  title = {foreword},
+  title+an = {=descriptor},
+  address = {Boston},
+  booktitle = {The Best American Essays of the Century},
+  date = {2000},
+  editor = {Joyce Carol Oates and Robert Atwan},
+  publisher = {Houghton},
+  pages = {x-xvi}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+It is quite rare for such items to have a true title in addition, so previous
+versions of \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} treated all titles of \texttt{suppbook}
+entries as descriptors.
+
+\tip{To restore the previous behaviour, include the following code:}
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppbook]{title}{#1}
+\end{tcblisting}
 
 \chapter{Works presented at meetings}\label{sec:proceedings}
 \chapterprecis{proceedings, mvproceedings, inproceedings, unpublished}
@@ -4254,8 +4358,14 @@ CNNR/GMH (Comisión Nacional de Reparación y Reconciliación y Grupo de Memoria
 
 \section{Reports with a type or series}
 
-%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, Series, Number (Location: Institution, Year).}
-%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, Series, Number (Location: Institution).}
+\tip{The number of a report will only be printed if you also supply a type or
+  series, or both. The difference between the two is that the series will be
+  separated from the (type and) number by a comma, while only a space
+  separates the type and number. In addition, if you supply a series but no
+  type, the number will be prefixed by `No.\@' or the localized equivalent.}
+
+%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, Series, Type Number (Location: Institution, Year).}
+%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, Series, Type Number (Location: Institution).}
 
 %</n|m|a|y>
 %<*a|y>
@@ -4279,9 +4389,6 @@ Office of Population Censuses and Surveys (1979a), \emph{Area Mortality Tables:
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, Type Number (Location: Institution, Year).}
-%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, Type Number (Location: Institution).}
-
 \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2>
 {opcs1979pnc}
 Office of Population Censuses and Surveys (1979b), \emph{Projections of the New Commonwealth and Pakistani Population}, OPCS Monitor PP2 79/1 (London)
@@ -4325,6 +4432,24 @@ Rosenblatt, J., et al. (1988), \emph{The Common Agricultural Policy of the Europ
 %</a|y>
 %<*n|m|a|y>%
 
+\section{Jointly published reports}
+
+It is more common with reports than with books for a work to be branded
+jointly by several issuing organizations. Neither the \emph{Oxford Guide to
+Style} nor \emph{New Hart's Rules} give explicit guidance on this, but I
+suggest handling it by giving corresponding lists as the \code{location}
+and \code{institution}:
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+  location = {Place 1 and Place 2 and Place 3},
+  institution = {Organization 1 and Organization 2 and Organization 3},
+\end{tcblisting}
+
+This will be printed as follows:
+
+\begin{tcolorbox}
+(Place 1: Organization 1, Place 2: Organization 2, and Place 3: Organization 3)
+\end{tcolorbox}
 
 \section{Theses}
 
@@ -4350,15 +4475,218 @@ Rosenblatt, J., et al. (1988), \emph{The Common Agricultural Policy of the Europ
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+The following forms are also supported; to use them, pass the \key{thesis} option:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+  \item \key{thesis}\texttt{=}\val{in}\par
+%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title} (Type, Institution, Year).}
+%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title} (Type, Institution).}
+  \item \key{thesis}\texttt{=}\val{plain}\par
+%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, Type, Institution, Year.}
+%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, Type, Institution.}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Booklets, leaflets, and other formal but unpublished texts}
+
+There are no obvious examples of this kind of material in the \emph{Oxford Guide
+to Style} or \emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{msbh1921fvd}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+@booklet{msbh1921fvd,
+  title = {The Facts about Venereal Diseases},
+  date = {1921},
+  howpublished = {distributed by the Missouri State Board of Health, Division of Venereal Diseases},
+  location = {Jefferson City, MO}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{lloyds2015m}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+@booklet{lloyds2015m,
+  author = {{Lloyds TSB Bank plc}},
+  title = {Mortgages},
+  date = {2015},
+  howpublished = {obtained in Paisley branch}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Patents}
+
+There are no examples of patents in the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} or
+\emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
+
+Following the conventions from \pkg{biblatex-chicago}, use \texttt{origdate} for
+the date the patent was filed (or the application was published), and
+\texttt{date} for the date the patent was finally issued or published.
+
+\tip{You can override the default date descriptions with the (non-standard)
+\code{origdatetype} and \code{datetype} fields.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{petroff.stapelbroek1980bib}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+@patent{petroff.stapelbroek1980bib,
+  author = {Petroff, M.~D. and Stapelbroek, M.~G.},
+  title = {Blocked impurity band detectors},
+  date = {1986-02-04},
+  origdate = {1980-10-23},
+  type = {patentus},
+  number = {4,586,960},
+  location = {Washington, DC},
+  publisher = {U.S. Patent and Trademark Office}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{arduengo.etal2001pmi}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+@patent{arduengo.etal2001pmi,
+  author = {Arduengo, III, Anthony J. and Gentry, Jr., Frederick P.
+    and Taverkere,  Prakash~K. and Simmons, III, Howard E.},
+  title = {Process for manufacture of imidazoles},
+  year = {2001},
+  type = {patentus},
+  holder = {{E.~I. DuPont}},
+  number = {6177575}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{pm1981opa}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+@patent{pm1981opa,
+  author = {{Phillipp Morris Inc.}},
+  title = {Optical perforating apparatus and system},
+  origdate = {1981-01-07},
+  date = {1985-05-15},
+  type = {patenteu},
+  number = {EP0021165}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{hideki1992qmc}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+@patent{hideki1992qmc,
+  author = {U. Hideki},
+  title = {Quadrature Modulation Circuit},
+  type = {patentjp},
+  number = {152932/92},
+  date = {1992-05-20}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Standards}
+
+There are no examples of technical standards in the \emph{Oxford Guide
+to Style} or \emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
+
+The particular quirk with standards entries is that the number is promoted to
+the head of the reference if an author is not specified (or \key{useauthor} is
+\val{false}). If this happens, the number is copied to \code{sortkey} so the
+entry appears in the right place in the reference list, unless you get there
+first with your own value of \code{sortkey}. You may want to do this if, for
+example, you want \enquote{ISO 1000} to come after \enquote{ISO 999}.
+
+\tip{You are encouraged to put the standards body in \code{organization}, but
+  you can use \code{publisher} instead.}
+
+\tip{The examples don't demonstrate it, but you can use the \code{version} field
+  for the version of the standard.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{bs5605:1990}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+@standard{bs5605:1990,
+  sortyear = {1990},
+  title = {Recommendations for citing and referencing published material},
+  number = {BS~5605:1990},
+%<!n&!m&!y>  shorthand = {BS5605},
+  organization = {British Standards Institute}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+%<*y>
+\begin{egcite}{}
+\cite{bs5605:1990}
+\end{egcite}
+%</y>
 
-The following form is also supported: to use it, pass the \texttt{altthesis} option.
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{w3c2017html5.2}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+@standard{w3c2017html5.2,
+  title = {{HTML} 5.2},
+  editor = {Steve Faulkner and Arron Eicholz and Travis Leithead and
+    Alex Danilo and Sangwhan Moon},
+  date = {2017-12-14},
+  type = {W3C Recommendation},
+  organization = {World Wide Web Consortium},
+  url = {https://www.w3.org/TR/html52/},
+  urldate = {2018-02-17}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
 
-%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, (Type, Institution, Year).}
-%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, (Type, Institution).}
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ietf.rfc1155}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+@standard{ietf.rfc1155,
+  author = {M. T. Rose and K. McCloghrie},
+  title = {Structure and identification of management information for {TCP/IP}-based internets},
+  date = {1990-05},
+  organization = {Internet Engineering Task Force},
+  series = {Request for Comments},
+  type = {Internet Standard},
+  number = {RFC~1155/STD~16},
+  doi = {10.17487/RFC1155}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
 
 
 \chapter{Audiovisual materials}\label{sec:audiovideo}
-\chapterprecis{audio, inaudio, image, movie, music, inmusic, video}
+\chapterprecis{artwork, audio, inaudio, image, movie, music, inmusic, performance, video}
 
 There are typically many contributors to an audiovisual work, and the priority given to each role is fluid. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} uses \code{author} for contributors that should go at the head of the reference, and \code{editor} for others. As well as the normal ones you can use the author\slash editor types \code{performer}, \code{conductor}, \code{director} and \code{reader}.
 
@@ -4713,7 +5041,7 @@ Sometimes publishers will put several works on a single release without giving i
 
 \tip{You can place up to four credits in the editor position, more if any of them correspond to the built-in editor types like \texttt{commentator} or \texttt{translator}.
   If you do supply a lot of credits, the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} recommends you shift them to the end of the reference.
-  You can do this with the \texttt{endeditor} option.}
+  You can do this with the \key{endeditor} option.}
 
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
@@ -4815,7 +5143,7 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prints all information about the transmission,
 %<n|m>\spec{\enquote{EpisodeTitle}, \emph{SeriesTitle}, \lit{Episode} EpisodeNumber, Channel, Date.}
 %<a|y>\spec{\enquote{EpisodeTitle} (Year), \emph{SeriesTitle}, \lit{Episode} EpisodeNumber, Channel, Day Month.}
 
-\tip{If the episode has a true title, the episide descriptor (e.g. ‘Episode 1’) goes in the \code{note} field.
+\tip{If the episode has a true title, the episide descriptor (e.g. \enquote{Episode 1}) goes in the \code{note} field.
   If it doesn't, the episode descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to remove the quote marks.
   Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the episode descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
 
@@ -4945,9 +5273,14 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prints all information about the transmission,
 \end{bibexbox}
 
 
-\section{Images}
+\section{Images and works of art}
 
-\tip{If desired, use \code{titleaddon} to specify the type of image.}
+\tip{If you need the type of image or arrtwork to appear in square brackets,
+  put it in \code{titleaddon}. Otherwise, put it in \code{type}.}
+
+\tip{Use \code{institution} (a list) or \code{venue} (a literal) for the
+  organization, museum, gallery or building physically hosting the image, and
+  \code{location} for where it is.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 %<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5>
@@ -4962,13 +5295,15 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prints all information about the transmission,
   author = {M. Clarke},
   title = {Exports of Coal to the IFS},
   titleaddon = {poster},
-  organization = {Manchester Art Gallery},
+  institution = {Manchester Art Gallery},
   url = {http://www.machestergalleries.org/the-collections/search-the-collection/display.php?EMUSESSID=70bd7f1a388d79a82f52ea9aae713ef2&irn=4128},
   urldate = {2013-11-05}}
 %<*n|m|a|y>
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\tip{Use \code{organization} for the website or online location of the image.}
+
 \begin{bibexbox}
 %<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5>
 %<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
@@ -4980,7 +5315,9 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prints all information about the transmission,
 %</n|m|a|y>
 @image{ibwNDcgs,
   title = {Christ the Good Shepherd},
-  note = {stained glass window, Church of St Erfyl, Llanerfyl, Powys},
+  type = {stained glass window},
+  venue = {Church of St Erfyl},
+  location = {Llanerfyl, Powys},
   organization = {Imaging the Bible in Wales Database},
   url = {http://imagingthebible.llgc.org.uk/object/1884},
   urldate = {2013-11-10}}
@@ -4988,12 +5325,133 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prints all information about the transmission,
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{davinci1480mr}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+@artwork{davinci1480mr,
+  author = {given=Leonardo, family=da Vinci},
+  title = {Madonna of the Rocks},
+  type = {oil on canvas},
+  note = {78 x 48.5 in\adddot},
+  year = {1480s},
+  date+an = {=inferred},
+  institution = {Louvre},
+  location = {Paris}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{gormley1998an}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+@artwork{gormley1998an,
+  author = {Anthony Gormley},
+  title = {Angel of the {North}},
+  date = {1998},
+  type = {sculpture},
+  location = {Low Fell, Gateshead}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{rodin1882k}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+@artwork{rodin1882k,
+  author = {Auguste Rodin},
+  title = {The Kiss},
+  date = {1882},
+  type = {marble},
+  institution = {Musée Rodin},
+  location = {Paris}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Performances}
+
+\tip{Use \code{origdate} for the date when the play, ballet, opera, or whatever
+  was written or premièred, and \code{date} for the date of the performance you
+  are referencing. You can specify what these dates signify with the
+  (non-standard) \code{origdatetype} and \code{datetype} fields. You can also
+  use \code{eventdate} in place of \code{date}, but then you won't be able to
+  specify the type.}
+
+\tip{As for recordings, you can use the \code{author} and \code{editor} fields
+  to provide various credits. As for artworks, use \code{venue} and
+  \code{location} for where the performance occurred, and \code{organization}
+  for a website or organization hosting a recording of the performance online.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ashton1937wb}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+@performance{ashton1937wb,
+  author = {Frederick Ashton},
+  origdate = {1937},
+  title = {A Wedding Bouquet},
+  venue = {Royal Opera House},
+  location = {London},
+  date = {2004-10-22}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{lord2007dc}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+@performance{lord2007dc,
+  author = {Jon Lord},
+  date = {2007-10-20},
+  title = {Durham Concerto},
+  editor = {{Liverpool Philharmonic Orchestra}},
+  editortype = {performer},
+  editora = {Mischa Damev},
+  editoratype = {conductor},
+  venue = {Durham Cathedral},
+  location = {Durham}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{judge1995mnd}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+@performance{judge1995mnd,
+  options = {useauthor=false,useeditor=false},
+  author = {William Shakespeare},
+  title = {A Midsummer Night's Dream},
+  editor = {Ian Judge},
+  editortype = {director},
+  date = {1995-02-26},
+  venue = {Theatre Royal},
+  location = {Newcastle upon Tyne}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
 
 \chapter{Digital media}\label{sec:electronic}
 \chapterprecis{online, software, dataset}
 
 In Section 18.8.5 of \emph{New Hart's Rules}, some publication dates are printed in parentheses and some are left bare.
-In theory, the difference should be that parentheses indicate ‘proper’ publication (bare dates are when the resource was created or issued). In practice, it seems to be random. I have therefore decided to ignore the variation and leave all such dates in parentheses.
+In theory, the difference should be that parentheses indicate \enquote{proper} publication (bare dates are when the resource was created or issued). In practice, it seems to be random. I have therefore decided to ignore the variation and leave all such dates in parentheses.
 
 \section{Website articles}
 
@@ -5130,14 +5588,14 @@ Standard \textsf{biblatex} only provides for one title for online resources, whi
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
+\tip{Unlike standard \textsf{biblatex}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} supports \code{maintitle} for online entries and prints the result in italics. For more portability, you could either hard-code the italics into the \code{organization} field or use the \code{article} entry type.}
+
 \info{It is not made explicit why \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} is in italics and \emph{Wikipedia} is not.
   It might be historical or customary, because \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} was established as a print publication and \emph{Wikipedia} has only been online;
   it might be because \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} is a Latin title;
   it might reflect an opinion on the two resources;
   or it may just be illustrative of variant practice.}
 
-\tip{Unlike standard \textsf{biblatex}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} supports \code{maintitle} for online entries and prints the result in italics. For more portability, you could either hard-code the italics into the \code{organization} field or use the \code{article} entry type.}
-
 \begin{bibexbox}
 %<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5>
 %<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
@@ -5224,7 +5682,7 @@ Standard \textsf{biblatex} only provides for one title for online resources, whi
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\tip{If it feels odd putting the entire content of a tweet in your reference, \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using a descriptor like ‘Twitter post’ instead of the title. As described in \cref{sec:broadcasts}, you can do this either by annotating the title field with the keyword \code{descriptor} or by using the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field in place of \code{title}.}
+\tip{If it feels odd putting the entire content of a tweet in your reference, \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using a descriptor like \enquote{Twitter post} instead of the title. As described in \cref{sec:broadcasts}, you can do this either by annotating the title field with the keyword \code{descriptor} or by using the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field in place of \code{title}.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 {oup2015tweet}
@@ -5362,7 +5820,7 @@ Use the \code{jurisdiction} entry type for citing cases.
 
 \tip{Several additional pagination types are defined for use with legal citations:
   \val{article}, \val{clause}, \val{regulation}, and \val{rule} all work as normal.
-  The default is a bare number (\val{none}), indicating a page reference, though EU and ECHR cases default to using the ‘para’ (\val{paragraph}) prefix.
+  The default is a bare number (\val{none}), indicating a page reference, though EU and ECHR cases default to using the \enquote{para} (\val{paragraph}) prefix.
   There is also an alternative pagination type for paragraphs, \val{[]}, which prints the number in square brackets instead of giving it a prefix.
 }
 
@@ -5486,6 +5944,8 @@ Test\footcite[13]{rvg2004}
 \end{egcite}
 %</y>
 
+%<y>\hack{Note that in the cases above and below, the head of the reference won't match the citation, which may cause confusion. You may wish to hack the in-text citation to fix this.}
+
 \tip{If a report is published a long time after the decision, you can put the decision date in \code{origdate} to clarify the situation.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
@@ -5625,7 +6085,7 @@ Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} are inconsiste
   The \key{ecli} option determines under what circumstances the identifier is printed.}
 
 \tip{European cases still get sorted by title, even if the entry begins with the case number.
-  Use \code{sorttitle} if you would rather they were sorted under ‘Case’ or ‘Joined Cases’.}
+  Use \code{sorttitle} if you would rather they were sorted under \enquote{Case} or \enquote{Joined Cases}.}
 
 \begin{bibexbox}
 <OGS \S13.4.4>
@@ -5647,7 +6107,7 @@ Case C–118/07 \emph{Commission of the European Communities v Finland} [2002] E
 \end{Verbatim}
 \end{bibexbox}
 
-\tip{Indicate Commission Decisions by putting \code{commission} in the \code{institution} field. If a decision has a formal decision number, put this in the \code{number} field. Put the case number (including the word ‘Case’ if needed) in either the \code{titleaddon}, \code{parvolume}, or \code{userb} field.}
+\tip{Indicate Commission Decisions by putting \code{commission} in the \code{institution} field. If a decision has a formal decision number, put this in the \code{number} field. Put the case number (including the word \enquote{Case} if needed) in either the \code{titleaddon}, \code{parvolume}, or \code{userb} field.}
 
 \tip{An unfortunate side effect of this is that is not possible to use either the parallel or neutral citation idiom to get a reference to look like the following. In such cases, use the \code{note} field to provide the second citation.}
 
@@ -5923,7 +6383,7 @@ Convention Relating to the Status of Refugees (adopted 28 July 1951, entered int
 @legal{refugees,
   entrysubtype = {piltreaty},
   title = {Convention Relating to the Status of Refugees},
-%<!m|a>  shorthand = {Refugee Convention},
+%<!m&!a>  shorthand = {Refugee Convention},
   execution = {adopted=1951-07-28 and inforce=1954-04-22},
   pagination = {article},
   volume = {189},
@@ -5934,7 +6394,7 @@ Convention Relating to the Status of Refugees (adopted 28 July 1951, entered int
 \end{bibexbox}
 
 %<*y>
-\tip{Since the lack of a \code{date} field may cause an inaccurate ‘n.d.’ label to be printed, use the \code{shorthand} field to provide a sensible citation label. You could use \cs{citetitle} the first time to ensure the reader can find it in the bibliography.}
+\tip{Since the lack of a \code{date} field may cause an inaccurate \enquote{n.d.\@} label to be printed, use the \code{shorthand} field to provide a sensible citation label. You could use \cs{citetitle} the first time to ensure the reader can find it in the bibliography. You can also suppress the \enquote{n.d.\@} label by specifying \code{sortyear} or using the \key{nonodate} option.}
 
 \begin{egcite}{(Refugee Convention: art.\@ 24)}
   \parencite[24]{refugees}
@@ -6026,7 +6486,7 @@ it provides the \code{commentary} entry type simply as an alias for \code{book}.
 
 
 \chapter{Specialist materials}\label{sec:special}
-\chapterprecis{misc, unpublished, letter}
+\chapterprecis{misc, unpublished, letter, manuscript}
 
 \section{Poems}\label{sec:poem}
 
@@ -6164,6 +6624,7 @@ Play titles, like those of epic poems, are set in italics rather than quoted.
   \code{act} and \code{scene} (\code{line} is already defined),
   though in reality you are probably better off doing it by hand.}
 
+
 \section{Manuscripts}\label{sec:ms}
 
 %<*y>
@@ -6171,8 +6632,8 @@ An author–date system like \textsf{oxyear} does not really lend itself to manu
 but support is provided anyway for the sake of completeness.
 
 %</y>
-%<n|m>\spec{Author, Title/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.}
-%<a|y>\spec{Author, Title/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.}
+%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.}
+%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.}
 
 With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can enter manuscripts in either of two ways. The first uses the \code{unpublished} entry type.
 
@@ -6193,7 +6654,7 @@ With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can enter manuscripts in either of two ways. The
 %<a|y><NHR 18.6.3*\textdagger>
 {smithMS23116}
 %<n|m>Francis Smith, travel diaries, 1912–7, British Library, Add. MS 23116.
-%<a|y>Smith, F. [1912–7], travel diaries, British Library, Add. MS 23116.
+%<a|y>Smith, F. (1912–7), travel diaries, British Library, Add. MS 23116.
 \tcblower
 \begin{Verbatim}
 %</n|m|a|y>
@@ -6232,7 +6693,7 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex
 %<a|y><NHR 18.6.2\textdagger>
 {chaundlerMS288}
 %<n|m>Thomas Chaundler, \enquote{Collocutiones}, Balliol College, Oxford, MS288.
-%<a|y>Chaundler, T. [n.d.], \enquote{Collocutiones}, Balliol College, Oxford, MS288.
+%<a|y>Chaundler, T. (n.d.), \enquote{Collocutiones}, Balliol College, Oxford, MS288.
 \tcblower
 \begin{Verbatim}
 %</n|m|a|y>
@@ -6251,7 +6712,7 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex
 %<a|y><NHR 18.6.2\textdagger>
 {exchequerE311}
 %<n|m>exchequer accounts, Dec. 1798, Cheshire Record Office, E311.
-%<a|y>exchequer accounts [1798], Dec., Cheshire Record Office, E311.
+%<a|y>exchequer accounts (1798), Dec., Cheshire Record Office, E311.
 \tcblower
 \begin{Verbatim}
 %</n|m|a|y>
@@ -6269,7 +6730,7 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex
 %<a|y><NHR 18.6.3\textdagger>
 {blcBOX19d}
 %<n|m>Bearsden Ladies' Club minutes, 12 June 1949, Bearsden and Milngavie District Libraries, box 19/d.
-%<a|y>Bearsden Ladies' Club minutes [1949], 12 June, Bearsden and Milngavie District Libraries, box 19/d.
+%<a|y>Bearsden Ladies' Club minutes (1949), 12 June, Bearsden and Milngavie District Libraries, box 19/d.
 \tcblower
 \begin{Verbatim}
 %</n|m|a|y>
@@ -6288,7 +6749,7 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex
 %<a|y><NHR 18.6.5\textdagger>
 {bodMSrawl-d520}
 %<n|m>Bodleian Library, Oxford, MS Rawlinson D. 520, fo. 7.
-%<a|y>Bodleian Library [n.d.], Oxford, MS Rawlinson D. 520, fo. 7.
+%<a|y>Bodleian Library (n.d.), Oxford, MS Rawlinson D. 520, fo. 7.
 \tcblower
 \begin{Verbatim}
 %</n|m|a|y>
@@ -6333,6 +6794,64 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex
 \end{egcite}
 %</y>
 
+
+\section{Letters}
+
+These examples relate to letters held personally or online. For letters that
+form part of archival collections, see the section on manuscripts above.
+
+Note that it is usually acceptable to exclude personal communications from
+the reference section, and simply cite them in the text (in which case you may
+not need the \pkg{biblatex} machinery).
+
+%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}/Descriptor, Date.}
+%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}/Descriptor, Date.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+%<n|m><OGS \S15.11.1*>
+%<a|y><OGS \S15.11.1*\textdagger>
+{anon2001pl}
+%<n|m>Personal letter to the author, 2 May 2001.
+%<a|y>Personal letter to the author (2001), 2 May.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+@letter{anon2001pl,
+  title = {Personal letter to the author},
+  title+an = {=descriptor},
+  date = {2001-05-02}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+In the absence of any explicit rationale governing whether the date is
+parenthetical, in \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} the presence of a URL
+will trigger the use of parentheses.
+
+%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}/Descriptor [HowPublished], (Date), OnlineAccess.}
+%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}/Descriptor [HowPublished], (Date), OnlineAccess.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+%<n|m><OGS \S15.15.3*>
+%<a|y><OGS \S15.15.3*\textdagger>
+{ritter2001rp}%
+%<n|m>R. M. Ritter, \enquote{Revised proofs} [email to H. E. Cox], (1 Aug.\@ 2001), \url{ogs@ritter.org.uk}, accessed 3 Aug.\@ 2001.
+%<a|y>Ritter, R. M. (2001), \enquote{Revised proofs} [email to H. E. Cox], (1 Aug.\@), \url{ogs@ritter.org.uk}, accessed 3 Aug.\@ 2001.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+@letter{ritter2001rp,
+  author = {R. M. Ritter},
+  title = {Revised proofs},
+  howpublished = {email to H. E. Cox},
+  date = {2001-08-01},
+  url = {ogs@ritter.org.uk},
+  urldate = {2001-08-03}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
 \printbibliography[notcategory=hidden]
 %</n|m|a|y>
 %</doc|bib>
@@ -6390,7 +6909,8 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \NewBibliographyString{%
-  director, performer, reader, conductor,
+  director, performer, reader, conductor, serieseditor, holder, editorcm,
+  directors, performers, readers, conductors, serieseditors, holders, editorcms,
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 % \begin{itemize}
@@ -6398,7 +6918,7 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex
 % \end{itemize}
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-  bydirector, byperformer, byreader, byconductor, byserieseditor,
+  bydirector, byperformer, byreader, byconductor, byserieseditor, byholder, byeditorcm,
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 % \begin{itemize}
@@ -6443,7 +6963,7 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex
 % \end{itemize}
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-  nolocation, modified, recorded, uploaded,
+  nolocation, modified, recorded, uploaded, filed, issued,
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 % \begin{itemize}
@@ -6455,6 +6975,14 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 % \begin{itemize}
+%   \item country names, patents, and patent requests;
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  countryjp, patentjp, patreqjp,
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{itemize}
 %   \item borrowed from other styles.
 % \end{itemize}
 %
@@ -6525,6 +7053,8 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex
 \newtoggle{blx@ox@nametitle}\toggletrue{blx@ox@nametitle}%
 \DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{usenametitles}[true]{%
   \settoggle{blx@ox@nametitle}{#1}}
+\DeclareTypeOption[boolean]{usenametitles}[true]{%
+  \settoggle{blx@ox@nametitle}{#1}}
 \DeclareEntryOption[boolean]{usenametitles}[true]{%
   \settoggle{blx@ox@nametitle}{#1}}
 %    \end{macrocode}
@@ -6728,7 +7258,7 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 % There is no comma before numeric suffixes, but there is before textual
-% ones (e.g. ‘junior’).
+% ones (e.g. \enquote{junior}).
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \xpatchbibmacro{name:given-family}%
@@ -6961,7 +7491,7 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex
   \finentry}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
-% We provide options for how to handle the author name ‘Anonymous’.
+% We provide options for how to handle the author name \enquote{Anonymous}.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newtoggle{blx@ox@autoanon}
@@ -6994,7 +7524,7 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex
 % The |author| macro is enhanced from the standard version by
 % \begin{itemize}
 %   \item
-%   checking if the author name is ‘Anonymous’;
+%   checking if the author name is \enquote{Anonymous};
 %   \item
 %   including a dash check, to see if the name(s) should be replaced
 %   with a dash (as in |authortitle| and |authoryear|);
@@ -7049,6 +7579,12 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex
 \DeclareFieldFormat{authortype}{\mkbibparens{#1}}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
+% We make the punctuation between a title and \enquote{by [author]} configurable.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\titlebyauthordelim}{\addspace}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
 % Following |authortitle| and |authoryear|, we redefine the |editor| and
 % |editor+others| macros to use a common |bbx:editor| macro. The macro
 % we use is the similar to the normal one except we delegate printing editor
@@ -7276,6 +7812,8 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex
 \newtoggle{blx@ox@timefirst}
 \DeclareBibliographyOption{timefirst}[true]{%
   \settoggle{blx@ox@timefirst}{#1}}
+\DeclareTypeOption{timefirst}[true]{%
+  \settoggle{blx@ox@timefirst}{#1}}
 \DeclareEntryOption{timefirst}[true]{%
   \settoggle{blx@ox@timefirst}{#1}}
 \newbibmacro*{date+time}{%
@@ -7330,6 +7868,23 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex
 }
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
+% If a date is inferred, it goes in square brackets.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{date}{%
+  \def\currentfield{date}%
+  \iffieldannotation{inferred}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}{#1}%
+  \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{origdate}{%
+  \def\currentfield{origdate}%
+  \iffieldannotation{inferred}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}{#1}%
+  \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{eventdate}{%
+  \def\currentfield{eventdate}%
+  \iffieldannotation{inferred}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}{#1}%
+  \undef\currentfield}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
 % \subsection{Editions, pages, and other number-like fields}
 %
 % We let |edition| take a localization key as well as a number.
@@ -7463,7 +8018,6 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex
     \do\={\mathbin{}\mskip-\Urlmuskip\mathchar`\=\mskip\Urlmuskip}%
     \do\?{\mathbin{}\mskip-\Urlmuskip\mathchar`\?\mskip\Urlmuskip}%
     \do\_{\mathbin{}\mskip-\Urlmuskip\_\mskip\Urlmuskip}%
-    \do\@{\mathbin{}\mskip-\Urlmuskip\@\mskip\Urlmuskip}%
     \do\#{\mathbin{}\mskip-\Urlmuskip\#\mskip\Urlmuskip}%
   }%
   \ifnumgreater{\value{biburlnumpenalty}}{0}
@@ -7546,7 +8100,7 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex
 % Subtypes for articles and similar are in square brackets.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[article,periodical,review]{entrysubtype}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[article,periodical,suppperiodical,review]{entrysubtype}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 % We provide a command for testing if a title is abbreviated. We use the
@@ -7698,8 +8252,16 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex
 \newtoggle{blx@ox@varissuedate}
 \DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{varissuedate}[true]{%
   \settoggle{blx@ox@varissuedate}{#1}}
+\DeclareTypeOption[boolean]{varissuedate}[true]{%
+  \settoggle{blx@ox@varissuedate}{#1}}
 \DeclareEntryOption[boolean]{varissuedate}[true]{%
   \settoggle{blx@ox@varissuedate}{#1}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{issuedate-plain}[true]{%
+  \settoggle{blx@ox@varissuedate}{#1}}
+\DeclareTypeOption[boolean]{issuedate-plain}[true]{%
+  \settoggle{blx@ox@varissuedate}{#1}}
+\DeclareEntryOption[boolean]{issuedate-plain}[true]{%
+  \settoggle{blx@ox@varissuedate}{#1}}
 \renewbibmacro*{issue+date}{%
   \ifboolexpr{
     test {\iffieldundef{issue}}
@@ -7753,7 +8315,7 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex
   \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
   \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{title}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}%
@@ -7822,6 +8384,68 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex
   \usebibmacro{finentry}}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
+% The |suppperiodical| driver is just like the |article| one, except the note
+% comes sooner after the title. This is to allow it to be used as a descriptor.
+% Since we're breaking the alias, we need to explicitly replicate the article
+% formatting for the rest of the entry.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppperiodical]{title}{%
+  \def\currentfield{title}%
+  \iffieldannotation{descriptor}{#1}{\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}%
+  \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppperiodical]{volume}{#1}% volume of a journal
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppperiodical]{number}{#1}% number of a journal
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppperiodical]{series}{% series of a journal
+  \ifinteger{#1}
+  {\mkbibordseries{#1}~\bibstring{jourser}}
+  {\ifbibstring{#1}{\bibstring{#1}}{#1}}}
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{suppperiodical}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+  \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{title}%
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}\clearfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{version}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle}%
+  \newunit
+  \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+  \iffieldequalstr{relatedtype}{suppto}{%
+    \setunit{\addsemicolon\space}%
+    \iftoggle{bbx:related}{%
+      \usebibmacro{related:init}%
+      \usebibmacro{related}%
+      \clearfield{related}%
+    }{}%
+  }{}%
+  \newunit
+  \usebibmacro{note+pages}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+    {\printfield{issn}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:related}
+    {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
+     \usebibmacro{related}}
+    {}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
 % \subsection{Books and works in books}
 %
 % By default, editors do not appear before the title in book or reference
@@ -7836,15 +8460,6 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex
 % however, are set in italics.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[bookinbook]{citetitle}{%
-  \ifboolexpr{
-    test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{poem}}
-    or
-    test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{play}}
-  }{%
-    \mkbibemph{#1}%
-  }{%
-    \mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}}
 \DeclareFieldFormat[bookinbook]{title}{%
   \ifboolexpr{
     test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{poem}}
@@ -7928,6 +8543,22 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
     \printfield{number}}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
+% We provide an option for displaying the series information before, instead of
+% within, the publication block.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoggle{blx@ox@altbookseries}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{bookseries}[in]{%
+  \ifstrequal{#1}{out}{%
+    \toggletrue{blx@ox@altbookseries}%
+  }{%
+    \togglefalse{blx@ox@altbookseries}%
+    \ifstrequal{#1}{in}{}{%
+      \PackageError{oxref}
+      {Invalid option 'bookseries=#1'}
+      {Valid values are 'in' and 'out'.}}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
 % When citing both the first and a later edition, the first one comes
 % first, and the later one comes after a semicolon. As per standard
 % \pkg{biblatex}, the elements of a single edition are separated by commas
@@ -8009,6 +8640,9 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newbibmacro*{series+number+edition+publisher+location+date}{%
+  \iftoggle{blx@ox@altbookseries}{%
+    \usebibmacro{series+number}%
+    \setunit{\addspace}\newblock}{}%
   \ifboolexpr{
     test {\iffieldundef{series}}
     and
@@ -8028,8 +8662,9 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   }{}{%
     \nopunct
     \printtext[publication]{%
-    \usebibmacro{series+number}%
-    \setunit{\addsemicolon\addspace}%
+    \iftoggle{blx@ox@altbookseries}{}{%
+      \usebibmacro{series+number}%
+      \setunit{\addsemicolon\addspace}}%
     \usebibmacro{edition+publisher+location+date}%
     \usebibmacro{copub}}}%
   \iffieldequalstr{relatedtype}{copub}{\clearfield{related}}%
@@ -8044,6 +8679,9 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newbibmacro*{series+number+publisher+location+date}{%
+  \iftoggle{blx@ox@altbookseries}{%
+    \usebibmacro{series+number}%
+    \setunit{\addspace}\newblock}{}%
   \ifboolexpr{
     test {\iffieldundef{series}}
     and
@@ -8061,8 +8699,9 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   }{}{%
     \nopunct
     \printtext[publication]{%
-    \usebibmacro{series+number}%
-    \setunit{\addsemicolon\addspace}%
+    \iftoggle{blx@ox@altbookseries}{}{%
+      \usebibmacro{series+number}%
+      \setunit{\addsemicolon\addspace}}%
     \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
     \usebibmacro{copub}}}%
   \iffieldequalstr{relatedtype}{copub}{\clearfield{related}}%
@@ -8129,7 +8768,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
   \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{title}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
@@ -8192,7 +8831,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   }{}{%
     \printfield{volume}%
     \printfield{part}}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
@@ -8243,7 +8882,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
   \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{title}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{in:}%
@@ -8261,7 +8900,61 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \printfield{volumes}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \printfield{note}%
-  \newunit\newblock%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{series+number+edition+publisher+location+date}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+  {\printfield{isbn}}
+  {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:related}
+  {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
+    \usebibmacro{related}}
+  {}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Our |suppbook| driver is just like |inbook| except that the note is moved
+% nearer the title so it can be used as a descriptor.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppbook]{title}{%
+  \def\currentfield{title}%
+  \iffieldannotation{descriptor}{#1}{\mkbibemph{#1}}%
+  \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{suppbook}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+  \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{title}%
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \setunit{\addspace}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{in:}%
+  \usebibmacro{bybookauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}%
+  \newunit
+  \iffieldundef{maintitle}
+  {\printfield{volume}%
+    \printfield{part}}
+  {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{volumes}%
+  \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{series+number+edition+publisher+location+date}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
@@ -8281,7 +8974,6 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
     \usebibmacro{related}}
   {}%
   \usebibmacro{finentry}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[suppbook]{title}{#1\nopunct}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 % We also provide a |bookinbook| driver that handles \code{origdate}
@@ -8294,7 +8986,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
   \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{title}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{in:}%
@@ -8313,7 +9005,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \newunit\newblock
   \printfield{note}%
   \newunit\newblock
-  \usebibmacro{series+number+publisher+location+date}%
+  \usebibmacro{series+number+edition+publisher+location+date}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
   \newunit\newblock
@@ -8444,7 +9136,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
   \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{title}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{in:}%
@@ -8482,6 +9174,58 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \usebibmacro{finentry}}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
+% Our |suppcollection| driver is just like |incollection| except that the note
+% is moved nearer the title so it can be used as a descriptor.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppcollection]{title}{%
+  \def\currentfield{title}%
+  \iffieldannotation{descriptor}{#1}{\mkbibemph{#1}}%
+  \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{suppcollection}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+  \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{title}%
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \setunit{\addspace}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{in:}%
+  \usebibmacro{bookeditor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}%
+  \newunit
+  \iffieldundef{maintitle}
+  {\printfield{volume}%
+    \printfield{part}}
+  {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{volumes}%
+  \newunit\newblock%
+  \usebibmacro{series+number+edition+publisher+location+date}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+  {\printfield{isbn}}
+  {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:related}
+  {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
+    \usebibmacro{related}}
+  {}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
 % Unlike the standard styles, we provide a separate driver for
 % |reference|. It is just like |book| except that |edition| is given
 % directly after the title.
@@ -8495,7 +9239,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \usebibmacro{title}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \printfield{edition}%
-  \newunit
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
@@ -8547,7 +9291,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
     \printfield{part}}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \printfield{edition}%
-  \newunit
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
@@ -8599,7 +9343,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
   \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{title}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \iffieldundef{editor}{}{%
@@ -8655,26 +9399,17 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 %
 % In our version of the |event+venue+date| macro, the venue and date
 % are set off with commas respectively instead of
-% parentheses. A bit of jiggery-pokery is used to make the colon italic
-% if it follows italic text.
+% parentheses.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \renewbibmacro*{event+venue+date}{%
   \printfield{eventtitle}%
   \newunit
   \printfield{eventtitleaddon}%
-  \ifboolexpr{
-    test {\iffieldundef{venue}}
-    and
-    test {\iffieldundef{eventyear}}
-  }{}{%
-    \iffieldundef{eventtitle}{%
-      \setunit{\mkbibemph{\addcomma}\space}%
-    }{%
-      \newunit}%
-    \printfield{venue}%
-    \newunit%
-    \printeventdate}%
+  \newunit
+  \printfield{venue}%
+  \newunit%
+  \printeventdate%
   \newunit}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
@@ -8754,7 +9489,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
   \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{title}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{in:}%
@@ -8825,8 +9560,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 %
 % Our version of the |institution+location+date| macro is just like the
 % standard one except it is wrapped in parentheses, and the preceding
-% punctuation is therefore suppressed. This is used by the standard
-% |thesis| driver, which also works well for us, and the |report| driver.
+% punctuation is therefore suppressed. This is used by the |report| driver.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \renewbibmacro*{institution+location+date}{%
@@ -8873,9 +9607,28 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newtoggle{blx@ox@altthesis}
+\newtoggle{blx@ox@plainthesis}
+\DeclareFieldAlias{thesis:publication}{publication}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{plain}{#1}
 \DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{altthesis}[true]{%
   \settoggle{blx@ox@altthesis}{#1}
 }
+\DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{thesis}[out]{%
+  \ifstrequal{#1}{plain}{%
+    \toggletrue{blx@ox@altthesis}%
+    \toggletrue{blx@ox@plainthesis}%
+    \DeclareFieldAlias{thesis:publication}{plain}%
+  }{%
+    \togglefalse{blx@ox@plainthesis}%
+    \DeclareFieldAlias{thesis:publication}{publication}%
+    \ifstrequal{#1}{in}{%
+      \toggletrue{blx@ox@altthesis}%
+    }{%
+      \togglefalse{blx@ox@altthesis}%
+      \ifstrequal{#1}{out}{}{%
+        \PackageError{oxref}
+        {Invalid option 'bookseries=#1'}
+        {Valid values are 'in', 'out', and 'plain'.}}}}}
 \newbibmacro*{type+institution+location+date}{%
   \iftoggle{blx@ox@altthesis}{%
     \ifboolexpr{
@@ -8891,8 +9644,8 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
       and
       test {\iffieldundef{month}}
     }{}{%
-      \nopunct
-      \printtext[publication]{%
+      \iftoggle{blx@ox@plainthesis}{}{\nopunct}%
+      \printtext[thesis:publication]{%
         \printfield{type}%
         \setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
         \printlist{location}%
@@ -8987,7 +9740,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   {\printfield{volume}%
     \printfield{part}}
   {}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \printfield{version}%
@@ -9034,25 +9787,150 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 }{}{}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
+% We give booklet entries descriptor support.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[booklet]{title}{%
+  \def\currentfield{title}%
+  \iffieldannotation{descriptor}{#1}{%
+    \mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}%
+  \undef\currentfield}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% With patents, the titles are italic and the patent type is not abbreviated.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[patent]{title}{\mkbibemph{#1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[patent]{type}{\ifbibstring{#1}{\biblstring{#1}}{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The |holder|, |origdate| and |date| fields have explicit signposting; the
+% latter two use |origdatetype| and |datetype|, with some sensible defaults.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareNameAlias{byholder}{default}
+\renewbibmacro*{byholder}{%
+  \ifnameundef{holder}{}{%
+    \bibstring{byholder}%
+    \setunit{\addspace}%
+    \printnames[byholder]{holder}}}
+\newbibmacro*{location+dates}{%
+  \ifboolexpr{
+    test {\iffieldundef{location}}
+    and
+    test {\iffieldundef{origyear}}
+    and
+    test {\iffieldundef{origmonth}}
+    and
+    test {\iffieldundef{year}}
+    and
+    test {\iffieldundef{month}}
+  }{}{%
+    \nopunct
+    \printtext[publication]{%
+      \printlist[][-\value{listtotal}]{location}%
+      \setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
+      \ifboolexpr{
+        test {\iffieldundef{origyear}}
+        and
+        test {\iffieldundef{origmonth}}
+      }{}{%
+        \iffieldundef{origdatetype}{%
+          \bibstring{filed}
+        }{
+          \printfield{origdatetype}}%
+        \setunit*{\addspace}}%
+      \usebibmacro{origdate+time}%
+      \setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
+      \ifboolexpr{
+        test {\iffieldundef{year}}
+        and
+        test {\iffieldundef{month}}
+      }{}{%
+        \iffieldundef{datetype}{%
+          \bibstring{issued}%
+        }{
+          \printfield{datetype}}%
+        \setunit*{\addspace}}%
+      \usebibmacro{date}}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The |patent| driver differs from the regular one by having |note| moved
+% further forward, and having a publication block consisting of |location|,
+% |origdate| and |date|.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{patent}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \usebibmacro{author}%
+  \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{title}%
+  \newunit
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{type}%
+  \setunit*{\addspace}%
+  \printfield{number}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byholder}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{location+dates}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:related}
+    {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
+     \usebibmacro{related}}
+    {}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Direct use of the |manual| entry type is not encouraged, but it serves as a
+% basis for other entry types, notably standards, datasets, and software.
 % The main change to the |manual| driver compared to the standard style is
 % that |type|, |series|, |number|, |edition| and |organization| are moved into
-% the publication information block with |publisher|, |location| and |date|;
+% the publication information block with |publisher|, |location| and |date|.
+% Note that standards will put the |number| field at the head of the reference
+% if there is no author.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \DeclareBibliographyDriver{manual}{%
   \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
   \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \ifboolexpr{
+    test {\ifentrytype{standard}}
+    and
+    ( test {\ifnameundef{author}}
+      or
+      not test \ifuseauthor )
+    and
+    not test {\iffieldundef{number}}
+  }{%
+    \printfield{number}\clearfield{number}%
+    \newunit\newblock
+  }{}%
   \usebibmacro{author/editor}%
   \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
-  \usebibmacro{title}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \ifentrytype{software}{%
+    \usebibmacro{title+version}%
+  }{%
+    \usebibmacro{title}}%
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byeditor}%
-  \newunit\newblock
-  \printfield{type}%
   \newunit
-  \printfield{version}%
+  \ifentrytype{software}{}{%
+    \newunit\printfield{version}}%
   \newunit
   \printfield{note}%
   \newunit\newblock
@@ -9077,6 +9955,8 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
     \usebibmacro{related}}
   {}%
   \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{standard}{manual}
+\ExecuteBibliographyOptions[standard]{useeditor=false}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 % \subsection{Audiovisual materials}
@@ -9113,11 +9993,11 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
     and
     test {\iffieldundef{month}}
     and
-    test {\iffieldundef{eventyear}}
+    test {\iffieldundef{origyear}}
     and
-    test {\iffieldundef{eventseason}}
+    test {\iffieldundef{origseason}}
     and
-    test {\iffieldundef{eventmonth}}
+    test {\iffieldundef{origmonth}}
     and
     test {\iffieldundef{hour}}
   }{}{%
@@ -9187,7 +10067,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   }{}%
   \setunit{\addspace}
   \usebibmacro{onlinetype}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{pre-byeditor+others}%
@@ -9239,7 +10119,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \usebibmacro{author}%
   \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{title}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{in:}%
@@ -9371,13 +10251,92 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
-% The examples of image references in \emph{New Hart's Rules} are all for online
-% images, and the |online| driver seems to work well for them. The main
-% difference is that they use a different format for the title.
+% The |performance| driver is similar to the |audio| driver, but instead of a
+% publication block, it displays a set of event-related fields. With a bit of
+% generosity, it can also work for artworks and images.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{performance}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \usebibmacro{author}%
+  \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{title}%
+  \newunit
+  \usebibmacro{maintitle}%
+  \iffieldequalstr{relatedtype}{includes}{%
+    \iftoggle{bbx:related}{%
+      \newunit\newblock
+      \usebibmacro{related:init}%
+      \usebibmacro{related}%
+      \clearfield{related}%
+    }{}%
+  }{}%
+  \setunit{\addspace}
+  \usebibmacro{onlinetype}%
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pre-byeditor+others}%
+  \setunit{\addspace}%
+  \printfield{howpublished}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{type}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \ifboolexpr{
+    test {\iffieldundef{origyear}}
+    and
+    test {\iffieldundef{origmonth}}
+  }{}{%
+    \setunit{\addspace}\newblock
+    \printtext[publication]{\usebibmacro{origdate+time}}}
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{event+venue+location+date}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{post-byeditor+others}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printlist{organization}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+  {\printfield{isbn}}
+  {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:related}
+  {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
+    \usebibmacro{related}}
+  {}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{image}{performance}
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{artwork}{performance}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Here is the macro used for printing the event location and date for
+% performances and exhibitions.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{image}{online}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[image]{title}{\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}
+\renewbibmacro*{event+venue+location+date}{%
+  \printfield{eventtitle}%
+  \newunit
+  \printfield{eventtitleaddon}%
+  \newunit
+  \printlist{institution}%
+  \newunit
+  \printfield{venue}%
+  \newunit
+  \printlist{location}%
+  \newunit%
+  \ifboolexpr{
+    test {\iffieldundef{year}}
+    and
+    test {\iffieldundef{month}}
+  }{\printeventdate}{\usebibmacro{date+time}}}
 
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
@@ -9389,7 +10348,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 % are written in roman text within quotes.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[online]{title}{%
+\DeclareFieldFormat[online,image]{title}{%
   \def\currentfield{title}%
   \iffieldannotation{descriptor}{#1}{\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}%
   \undef\currentfield}
@@ -9437,7 +10396,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \usebibmacro{maintitle}
   \setunit{\addspace}%
   \usebibmacro{onlinetype}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
@@ -9502,45 +10461,10 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 \DeclareFieldFormat[software]{urldate}{\bibstring{urldown}\space#1}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
-% The software driver is based loosely on the manual driver.
+% The software driver is a variant of the manual driver.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareBibliographyDriver{software}{%
-  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
-  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
-  \usebibmacro{author/editor}%
-  \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
-  \usebibmacro{title+version}%
-  \newunit\newblock
-  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
-  \newunit\newblock
-  \usebibmacro{byeditor}%
-  \newunit\newblock
-  \printfield{type}%
-  \newunit
-  \printfield{note}%
-  \newunit\newblock
-  \usebibmacro{type+series+number+edition+organization+publisher+location+date}%
-  \newunit\newblock
-  \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
-  \newunit
-  \printfield{pagetotal}%
-  \newunit\newblock
-  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
-  {\printfield{isbn}}
-  {}%
-  \newunit\newblock
-  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
-  \newunit\newblock
-  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
-  \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
-  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
-  \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
-  \iftoggle{bbx:related}
-  {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
-    \usebibmacro{related}}
-  {}%
-  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{software}{manual}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 % \subsubsection{Datasets}
@@ -10577,12 +11501,16 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
     test {\ifnameundef{author}}
     and
     test {\iffieldundef{title}}
+    and
+    test {\iffieldundef{label}}
   }{}{\usebibmacro{date}}}
 \newbibmacro{dating}{%
   \ifboolexpr{(
       test {\ifnameundef{author}}
       and
       test {\iffieldundef{title}}
+      and
+      test {\iffieldundef{label}}
     ) or
     test {\iffieldundef{year}}
   }{%
@@ -10662,7 +11590,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \usebibmacro{author}%
   \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{title}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \printfield{howpublished}%
@@ -10723,13 +11651,13 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \usebibmacro{author}%
   \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{title}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
-  \printfield{howpublished}%
-  \newunit\newblock
   \printfield{note}%
   \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{howpublished}%
+  \newunit\newblock
   \iftoggle{blx@ox@ms}{%
     \usebibmacro{manuscript:date}%
     \newunit\newblock
@@ -10757,7 +11685,20 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
      \usebibmacro{related}}
     {}%
   \usebibmacro{finentry}}
-
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Letters}
+%
+% The driver for letters is similar to the one for other unpublished materials.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{letter}{unpublished}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[letter]{title}{%
+  \def\currentfield{title}%
+  \iffieldannotation{descriptor}{#1}{\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}%
+  \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[letter]{date}{%
+  \iffieldundef{url}{#1}{\mkbibparens{#1}}}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 % \subsection{Related entries}
@@ -10780,13 +11721,6 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
   \iftoggle{bbx:related}
 }{}{}
-\xpatchbibdriver{patent}{%
-  \newunit\newblock
-  \iftoggle{bbx:related}
-}{%
-  \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
-  \iftoggle{bbx:related}
-}{}{}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 % We provide an option for setting the relatedtype punctuation.
@@ -10804,6 +11738,18 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
     }{%
       Valid values are 'dot', 'comma', 'semicolon', 'colon',\MessageBreak
       'period', 'exclam', 'question', and 'space'.}}}
+\DeclareTypeOption{relationpunct}[semicolon]{%
+  \ifcsdef{add#1}{%
+    \ifstrequal{#1}{space}{%
+      \renewcommand*{\relatedtypepunct}{\addspace}%
+    }{%
+      \renewcommand*{\relatedtypepunct}{\csuse{add#1}\space}}%
+  }{%
+    \PackageError{biblatex-oxref}{%
+      Invalid option 'relationpunct=#1'%
+    }{%
+      Valid values are 'dot', 'comma', 'semicolon', 'colon',\MessageBreak
+      'period', 'exclam', 'question', and 'space'.}}}
 \newtoggle{blx@ox@relpunctset}
 \DeclareEntryOption{relationpunct}[semicolon]{%
   \ifcsdef{add#1}{%
@@ -10977,7 +11923,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
   \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{title}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}%
@@ -11032,7 +11978,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 %
 % \subsubsection{Related editions}
 %
-% This macro is based on the ‘bytranslator’ one, but more general.
+% This macro is based on the \enquote{bytranslator} one, but more general.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newbibmacro*{related:editedas}[1]{%
@@ -11245,9 +12191,25 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
     }
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
+% \subsubsection{Standards}
+%
+% The purpose of this map is to move the number to the head of the reference
+% in the absence of an author, and try to fix the sorting accordingly.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \map[overwrite=false]{
+      \pertype{standard}
+      \step[notfield=author,
+            fieldsource=number,
+            final]
+      \step[fieldset=sortkey,
+            origfieldval]
+    }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
 % \subsubsection{Audiovisual materials}
 %
-% For audiovisual materials, |origdatetype| defaults to ‘recorded’.
+% For audiovisual materials, |origdatetype| defaults to \enquote{recorded}.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
     \map[overwrite=false]{
@@ -11546,8 +12508,8 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \ExecuteBibliographyOptions
-  [proceedings,report,audio,music,movie,video,manuscript,unpublished,review]%
-  {useeditor=false}
+  [proceedings,report,artwork,audio,image,music,movie,performance,video,%
+  manuscript,unpublished,review]{useeditor=false}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 % \iffalse %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
@@ -11781,6 +12743,13 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
        {Invalid option 'mergedate=#1'}
        {Valid values are 'maximum', 'compact', 'basic', 'minimum',\MessageBreak
         'year', 'true' (=year), and 'false'.}}}
+\DeclareTypeOption{mergedate}[true]{%
+  \ifcsdef{bbx@opt@mergedate@#1}
+    {\csuse{bbx@opt@mergedate@#1}}
+    {\PackageError{biblatex}
+       {Invalid option 'mergedate=#1'}
+       {Valid values are 'maximum', 'compact', 'basic', 'minimum',\MessageBreak
+        'year', 'true' (=year), and 'false'.}}}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 % The various values affect the definition of the following macro, used at
@@ -11789,6 +12758,16 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \providebibmacro*{date+extradate}{}
 \DeclareFieldFormat{datelabel}{\mkbibparens{#1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{labeldate}{%
+  \iflabeldateisdate{%
+    \def\currentfield{date}%
+  }{%
+    \iflabeldateisanydate{%
+      \def\currentfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}date}%
+    }{%
+      \def\currentfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}}%
+  \iffieldannotation{inferred}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}{#1}%
+  \undef\currentfield}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 % On a related note, the |labeldate| uses the |origdate| if provided in
@@ -11834,7 +12813,27 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \ifboolexpr{%
     not test {\iffieldundef{labeldatesource}}
     and test {\iffieldequalstr{labeldatesource}{pubstate}}}}
-
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We also provide a wrapper around \cs{printlabeldateextra} that does nothing
+% if the label date is the `nodate' literal \emph{and} |sortyear| is defined.
+% Sadly |sortyear| is consumed before we get to this point, so we need a proxy
+% toggle.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoggle{blx@ox@nonodate}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{nonodate}[true]{%
+  \settoggle{blx@ox@nonodate}{#1}}
+\DeclareTypeOption[boolean]{nonodate}[true]{%
+  \settoggle{blx@ox@nonodate}{#1}}
+\DeclareEntryOption[boolean]{nonodate}[true]{%
+  \settoggle{blx@ox@nonodate}{#1}}
+\newbibmacro*{labeldate}{%
+  \ifboolexpr{
+    test {\iffieldequalstr{labeldatesource}{nodate}}
+    and
+    togl {blx@ox@nonodate}
+  }{}{\printtext[datelabel]{\printlabeldateextra}}}
 
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
@@ -11865,23 +12864,23 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 \def\bbx@opt@mergedate@maximum{%
   \renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{%
     \iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{%
-      \printtext[datelabel]{%
-        \iflabeldateisdate{%
+      \iflabeldateisdate{%
+        \printtext[datelabel]{%
           \printfield{issue}\clearfield{issue}%
           \setunit*{\addspace}%
-          \printdateextra
-          \clearfield{year}\clearfield{season}\clearfield{month}\clearfield{day}%
+          \printdateextra}%
+        \clearfield{year}\clearfield{season}\clearfield{month}\clearfield{day}%
+      }{%
+        \iflabeldateisanydate{%
+          \printtext[datelabel]{%
+            \csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}dateextra}}%
+          \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}%
+          \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}season}%
+          \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}month}%
+          \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}day}%
         }{%
-          \iflabeldateisanydate{%
-            \csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}dateextra}%
-            \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}%
-            \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}season}%
-            \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}month}%
-            \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}day}%
-          }{%
-            \printlabeldateextra
-            \iflabeldateispubstate{}{\clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}%
-          }}}}}}
+          \usebibmacro{labeldate}%
+          \iflabeldateispubstate{}{\clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}}}}}}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 % \begin{itemize}
@@ -11894,21 +12893,20 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 \def\bbx@opt@mergedate@compact{%
   \renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{%
     \iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{%
-      \printtext[datelabel]{%
-        \iflabeldateisdate{%
-          \printdateextra
-          \clearfield{year}\clearfield{season}\clearfield{month}\clearfield{day}%
+      \iflabeldateisdate{%
+        \printtext[datelabel]{\printdateextra}%
+        \clearfield{year}\clearfield{season}\clearfield{month}\clearfield{day}%
+      }{%
+        \iflabeldateisanydate{%
+          \printtext[datelabel]{%
+            \csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}dateextra}}%
+          \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}%
+          \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}season}%
+          \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}month}%
+          \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}day}%
         }{%
-          \iflabeldateisanydate{%
-            \csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}dateextra}%
-            \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}%
-            \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}season}%
-            \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}month}%
-            \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}day}%
-          }{%
-            \printlabeldateextra
-            \iflabeldateispubstate{}{\clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}%
-          }}}}}}
+          \usebibmacro{labeldate}%
+          \iflabeldateispubstate{}{\clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}}}}}}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 % \begin{itemize}
@@ -11922,7 +12920,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 \def\bbx@opt@mergedate@year{%
   \renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{%
     \iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{%
-      \printtext[datelabel]{\printlabeldateextra}%
+      \usebibmacro{labeldate}%
       \iflabeldateisdate{%
         \clearfield{year}
       }{%
@@ -11944,7 +12942,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 \def\bbx@opt@mergedate@basic{%
   \renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{%
     \iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{%
-      \printtext[datelabel]{\printlabeldateextra}%
+      \usebibmacro{labeldate}%
       \iflabeldateisdate{%
         \ifboolexpr{
           test {\ifdateshavedifferentprecision{label}{}}
@@ -11972,7 +12970,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 \def\bbx@opt@mergedate@minimum{%
   \renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{%
     \iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{%
-      \printtext[datelabel]{\printlabeldateextra}%
+      \usebibmacro{labeldate}%
       \iflabeldateisdate{%
         \ifboolexpr{
           test {\ifdateshavedifferentprecision{label}{}}
@@ -12004,7 +13002,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 \def\bbx@opt@mergedate@false{%
   \renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{%
     \iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{%
-      \printtext[datelabel]{\printlabeldateextra}%
+      \usebibmacro{labeldate}%
       \iflabeldateisanydate{}{%
         \iflabeldateispubstate{}{\clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}%
       }}}}
@@ -12388,9 +13386,17 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 % the equivalent information in the bibliography entry.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[online,image]{citetitle}{\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[legislation,legal]{citetitle}{#1}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[manuscript,unpublished]{citetitle}{%
+\DeclareFieldFormat[bookinbook]{citetitle}{%
+  \ifboolexpr{
+    test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{poem}}
+    or
+    test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{play}}
+  }{%
+    \mkbibemph{#1}%
+  }{%
+    \mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppperiodical,inaudio,inmusic,inmovie,invideo,online,%
+    image,manuscript,unpublished]{citetitle}{%
   \def\currentfield{title}%
   \ifboolexpr{
     test {\iffieldannotation{descriptor}}
@@ -12401,6 +13407,72 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
     )
   }{#1}{\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}%
   \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppperiodical,inaudio,inmusic,inmovie,invideo,online,%
+    image,manuscript,unpublished]{citetitle}{%
+  \def\currentfield{title}%
+  \ifboolexpr{
+    test {\iffieldannotation{descriptor}}
+    or (
+      test {\iffieldundef{shorttitle}}
+      and
+      test {\iffieldundef{title}}
+    )
+  }{#1}{\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}%
+  \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[audio,music]{citetitle}{%
+  \def\currentfield{title}%
+  \ifboolexpr{
+    test {\iffieldannotation{descriptor}}
+    or (
+      test {\iffieldundef{shorttitle}}
+      and
+      test {\iffieldundef{title}}
+    )
+  }{#1}{%
+    \iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{podcast}{%
+      \mkbibquote{#1\isdot}%
+    }{%
+      \mkbibemph{#1}}}%
+  \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[movie,video]{citetitle}{%
+  \def\currentfield{title}%
+  \ifboolexpr{
+    test {\iffieldannotation{descriptor}}
+    or (
+      test {\iffieldundef{shorttitle}}
+      and
+      test {\iffieldundef{title}}
+    )
+  }{#1}{%
+    \ifboolexpr{
+      test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{episode}}
+      or
+      test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{clip}}
+      or
+      test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{webcast}}
+    }{%
+      \mkbibquote{#1\isdot}%
+    }{%
+      \mkbibemph{#1}}}%
+  \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[legislation,legal]{citetitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[misc]%
+    {citetitle}{%
+  \def\currentfield{title}%
+  \ifboolexpr{
+    test {\iffieldannotation{descriptor}}
+    or (
+      test {\iffieldundef{shorttitle}}
+      and
+      test {\iffieldundef{title}}
+    )
+  }{#1}{%
+    \iffieldequalstr{relatedtype}{in}{%
+      \mkbibquote{#1\isdot}%
+    }{%
+      \mkbibemph{#1}%
+    }}%
+  \undef\currentfield}
 
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
@@ -12426,17 +13498,6 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 %
 % \subsection{Manuscripts}
 %
-% The dates for manuscripts should not really be in parentheses, but it
-% looks really odd to have them bare, when compared to other entries.
-% As a compromise, we use square brackets.
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[manuscript]{datelabel}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[unpublished]{datelabel}{%
-  \iftoggle{blx@ox@ms}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}{\mkbibparens{#1}}}
-\renewbibmacro*{manuscript:date}{\usebibmacro{date}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
 % We include the |library| field as a fallback title.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -12446,6 +13507,51 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \field{maintitle}
   \field{library}
 }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Source maps}
+%
+% We use the source mapping capabilities of Biber to fix the following issues.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareStyleSourcemap{%
+  \maps[datatype=bibtex]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Suppressing a \enquote{nodate} label}
+%
+% Unless already set, the \key{nonodate} option is inserted if |sortyear| is
+% used. We accomplish this with source maps; the first one works where options
+% (not including |nonodate|) have been set, the second where no options have
+% been set.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \map[overwrite=true]{
+      \step[notmatch=\regexp{nonodate}, fieldsource=options, final]
+      \step[fieldsource=sortyear, final]
+      \step[fieldset=options, append, fieldvalue={,nonodate}]
+    }
+    \map[overwrite=true]{
+      \step[notfield=options, final]
+      \step[fieldsource=sortyear, final]
+      \step[fieldset=options, fieldvalue={nonodate}]
+    }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Standards}
+%
+% The purpose of this map is to change the number into a label in the absence
+% of an author, so that the citations come out right and the date is positioned
+% correctly.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \map[overwrite=false]{
+      \pertype{standard}
+      \step[notfield=author,
+            fieldsource=number,
+            fieldtarget=label]
+    }
+}}
 
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
@@ -12482,37 +13588,12 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 }{%
   \csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}date}
 }{}{}
-\xpatchcmd{\bbx@opt@mergedate@maximum}{%
-  \printlabeldateextra
-}{%
-  \printlabeldate
-}{}{}
 \xpatchcmd{\bbx@opt@mergedate@compact}{%
   \csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}dateextra}
 }{%
   \csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}date}
 }{}{}
-\xpatchcmd{\bbx@opt@mergedate@compact}{%
-  \printlabeldateextra
-}{%
-  \printlabeldate
-}{}{}
-\xpatchcmd{\bbx@opt@mergedate@year}{%
-  \printlabeldateextra
-}{%
-  \printlabeldate
-}{}{}
-\xpatchcmd{\bbx@opt@mergedate@basic}{%
-  \printlabeldateextra
-}{%
-  \printlabeldate
-}{}{}
-\xpatchcmd{\bbx@opt@mergedate@minimum}{%
-  \printlabeldateextra
-}{%
-  \printlabeldate
-}{}{}
-\xpatchcmd{\bbx@opt@mergedate@false}{%
+\xpatchbibmacro{labeldate}{%
   \printlabeldateextra
 }{%
   \printlabeldate
@@ -12645,19 +13726,18 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{uniquename=init}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
-% We patch it with our version of year range compression.
+% We provide a slightly different labeldate macro that obeys the \code{nonodate}
+% option.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-\xpatchbibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}{%
-  \printfield{labelendyear}%
-}{%
-  \iffieldundef{extradate}{%
-    \blx@ox@compyear
-      {\thefield{labelyear}}%
-      {\thefield{labelendyear}}%
-  }{%
-    \printfield{labelendyear}}%
-}{}{}
+\newbibmacro*{cite:labeldate+extradate}{%
+  \ifboolexpr{
+    test {\iffieldundef{labelyear}}
+    or
+    ( test {\iffieldequalstr{labeldatesource}{nodate}}
+      and
+      togl {blx@ox@nonodate} )
+  }{}{\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printlabeldateextra}}}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 % We insert anonymous author handling into |cite|.
@@ -12681,7 +13761,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 % The name and year are usually separated by a space, but if the date is
-% replaced by a word (e.g. ‘forthcoming’, ‘n.d.’), they are separated by
+% replaced by a word (e.g. \enquote{forthcoming}, \enquote{n.d.}), they are separated by
 % a comma.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -12699,6 +13779,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 % non-compressed citations.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\multicitedelim}{\addsemicolon\space}
 \renewcommand*{\compcitedelim}{\addsemicolon\space}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
@@ -12717,7 +13798,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 %
 % \setcounter{FancyVerbLine}{19}
 %
-% The standard |numeric| style works without further adjustment.
+% The standard |numeric| style works, needing only a little configuration.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \RequireCitationStyle{numeric-comp}
@@ -12727,6 +13808,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 % non-compressed citations.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\multicitedelim}{\addsemicolon\space}
 \renewcommand*{\compcitedelim}{\addsemicolon\space}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
@@ -12745,7 +13827,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 %
 % \setcounter{FancyVerbLine}{19}
 %
-% The standard |alphabetic| style works without further adjustment.
+% The standard |alphabetic| style works, needing only a little configuration.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \RequireCitationStyle{alphabetic}
@@ -12755,6 +13837,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 % non-compressed citations.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\multicitedelim}{\addsemicolon\space}
 \renewcommand*{\compcitedelim}{\addsemicolon\space}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
@@ -12775,7 +13858,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 % This code is appended to all the citation style files.
 %
 % We fix the |textcite| macro so if the \key{anon} option is set to \val{long}
-% or \val{short}, a value of ‘Anonymous’ is replaced by the bibstring.
+% or \val{short}, a value of \enquote{Anonymous} is replaced by the bibstring.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \xpatchbibmacro{textcite}{%
@@ -12836,7 +13919,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 % The |rawauthor| field is used internally for checking whether an
-% the name given in the |author| field is a keyword meaning ‘anonymous’.
+% the name given in the |author| field is a keyword meaning \enquote{anonymous}.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{rawauthor}
@@ -12921,9 +14004,19 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
   director         = {{director}{dir\adddot}},
+  directors        = {{directors}{dirs\adddot}},
   performer        = {{}{}},
+  performers       = {{}{}},
   reader           = {{reader}{reader}},
+  readers          = {{readers}{readers}},
   conductor        = {{conductor}{cond\adddot}},
+  conductors       = {{conductors}{cond\adddot}},
+  serieseditor     = {{series editor}{ser\adddotspace ed\adddot}},
+  serieseditors    = {{series editors}{ser\adddotspace eds\adddot}},
+  holder           = {{holder}{holder}},
+  holders          = {{holders}{holders}},
+  editorcm         = {{editor and compiler}{ed\adddotspace and comp\adddot}},
+  editorcms        = {{editors and compilers}{eds\adddotspace and comp\adddot}},
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 % \begin{itemize}
@@ -12936,6 +14029,8 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   byreader         = {{read by}{read by}},
   byconductor      = {{conducted by}{cond\adddot}},
   byserieseditor   = {{edited by}{ed\adddot}},
+  byholder         = {{held by}{held by}},
+  byeditorcm       = {{edited and compiled by}{ed\adddotspace and comp\adddot}},
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 % \begin{itemize}
@@ -12945,7 +14040,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 %    \begin{macrocode}
   facsimile        = {{facsimile edition}{facs\adddotspace edn\adddot}},
   revised          = {{revised edition}{rev\adddotspace edn\adddot}},
-  revisedenlarged  = {{revised and enlarged edition}{rev\adddotspace ane enl\addotspace edn\adddot}},
+  revisedenlarged  = {{revised and enlarged edition}{rev\adddotspace and enl\addotspace edn\adddot}},
   revisedreprint   = {{revised reprint}{rev\adddotspace repr\adddot}},
   suppto           = {{Supplement to}{Supplement to}},
   equals           = {{=}{=}},
@@ -13029,6 +14124,8 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   modified         = {{last modified}{last modified}},
   recorded         = {{recorded}{recorded}},
   uploaded         = {{uploaded}{uploaded}},
+  filed            = {{filed}{filed}},
+  issued           = {{issued}{issued}},
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 % \begin{itemize}
@@ -13042,6 +14139,16 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 % \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Country names, patents, and patent requests,
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  countryjp        = {{Japan}{JP}},
+  patentjp         = {{Japanese patent}{Japanese pat.\adddot}},
+  patreqjp         = {{Japanese patent request}{Japanese pat.\adddot req.\adddot}},
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{itemize}
 %   \item These are borrowed from other styles.
 % \end{itemize}
 %
@@ -13071,8 +14178,8 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 % Many of these are guesses extrapolated from what is given.
 %
 % The roles expressed as functions do not need adjusting. The roles
-% expressed as actions do not typically end in ‘by’ when abbreviated;
-% the ‘with’ parts go first when abbreviated if there is more than one
+% expressed as actions do not typically end in \enquote{by} when abbreviated;
+% the \enquote{with} parts go first when abbreviated if there is more than one
 % editorial role (at least, that is one way of interpreting the examples).
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -13184,21 +14291,21 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   origpubin        = {{originally published in}{originally pub\adddot}},
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
-% There is also a different abbreviation for ‘paragraph’.
+% There is also a different abbreviation for \enquote{paragraph}.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
   paragraph        = {{paragraph}{para\adddot}},
   paragraphs       = {{paragraphs}{paras\adddot}},
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
-% \emph{New Hart's Rules} uses ‘accessed’ for URL dates.
+% \emph{New Hart's Rules} uses \enquote{accessed} for URL dates.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
   urlseen          = {{accessed}{accessed}},
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
-% Scholarly citation terms are abbreviated. Oxford style is to use ‘henceforth’
-% for shorthands and ‘at’ to cite a page within a range.
+% Scholarly citation terms are abbreviated. Oxford style is to use \enquote{henceforth}
+% for shorthands and \enquote{at} to cite a page within a range.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
   idem             = {{idem}{id\adddot}},
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/american-oxref.lbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/american-oxref.lbx
index b676a135588..2d5b7073fd7 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/american-oxref.lbx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/american-oxref.lbx
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
 %% See:     http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
 %% ----------------------------------------------------------------
 %% 
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
 \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
 \ProvidesFile{american-oxref.lbx}
     [\Version\space American English conventions required by the biblatex-oxref styles]
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/british-oxref.lbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/british-oxref.lbx
index 916bcab9ed0..3bbb4ff5003 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/british-oxref.lbx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/british-oxref.lbx
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
 %% See:     http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
 %% ----------------------------------------------------------------
 %% 
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
 \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
 \ProvidesFile{british-oxref.lbx}
     [\Version\space British English conventions required by the biblatex-oxref styles]
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/english-oxref.lbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/english-oxref.lbx
index 7bcc4501a7d..b7d66667c75 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/english-oxref.lbx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/english-oxref.lbx
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
 %% See:     http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
 %% ----------------------------------------------------------------
 %% 
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
 \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
 \ProvidesFile{english-oxref.lbx}
     [\Version\space Generic English conventions required by the biblatex-oxref styles]
@@ -33,17 +33,29 @@
 \DeclareBibliographyStrings{%
   inherit          = {english},
   director         = {{director}{dir\adddot}},
+  directors        = {{directors}{dirs\adddot}},
   performer        = {{}{}},
+  performers       = {{}{}},
   reader           = {{reader}{reader}},
+  readers          = {{readers}{readers}},
   conductor        = {{conductor}{cond\adddot}},
+  conductors       = {{conductors}{cond\adddot}},
+  serieseditor     = {{series editor}{ser\adddotspace ed\adddot}},
+  serieseditors    = {{series editors}{ser\adddotspace eds\adddot}},
+  holder           = {{holder}{holder}},
+  holders          = {{holders}{holders}},
+  editorcm         = {{editor and compiler}{ed\adddotspace and comp\adddot}},
+  editorcms        = {{editors and compilers}{eds\adddotspace and comp\adddot}},
   byperformer      = {{}{}},
   bydirector       = {{directed by}{dir\adddot}},
   byreader         = {{read by}{read by}},
   byconductor      = {{conducted by}{cond\adddot}},
   byserieseditor   = {{edited by}{ed\adddot}},
+  byholder         = {{held by}{held by}},
+  byeditorcm       = {{edited and compiled by}{ed\adddotspace and comp\adddot}},
   facsimile        = {{facsimile edition}{facs\adddotspace edn\adddot}},
   revised          = {{revised edition}{rev\adddotspace edn\adddot}},
-  revisedenlarged  = {{revised and enlarged edition}{rev\adddotspace ane enl\addotspace edn\adddot}},
+  revisedenlarged  = {{revised and enlarged edition}{rev\adddotspace and enl\addotspace edn\adddot}},
   revisedreprint   = {{revised reprint}{rev\adddotspace repr\adddot}},
   suppto           = {{Supplement to}{Supplement to}},
   equals           = {{=}{=}},
@@ -99,9 +111,14 @@
   modified         = {{last modified}{last modified}},
   recorded         = {{recorded}{recorded}},
   uploaded         = {{uploaded}{uploaded}},
+  filed            = {{filed}{filed}},
+  issued           = {{issued}{issued}},
   anon             = {{Anonymous}{Anon\adddot}},
   pseudo           = {{Pseudo-}{Ps\adddot-}},
   urldown          = {{downloaded}{downloaded}},
+  countryjp        = {{Japan}{JP}},
+  patentjp         = {{Japanese patent}{Japanese pat.\adddot}},
+  patreqjp         = {{Japanese patent request}{Japanese pat.\adddot req.\adddot}},
   1column          = {{one column}{1\addnbspace col\adddot}},
   2column          = {{two columns}{2\addnbspace col\adddot}},
   inflayer         = {{inferior layer}{inf\adddotspace lay\adddot}},
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph.bbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph.bbx
index 34ee93433ae..7c5a7f8abce 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph.bbx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph.bbx
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
 %% See:     http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
 %% ----------------------------------------------------------------
 %% 
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
 \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
 \ProvidesFile{oxalph.bbx}
     [\Version\space Alphabetic bibliography style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
@@ -28,37 +28,12 @@
 }{%
   \csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}date}
 }{}{}
-\xpatchcmd{\bbx@opt@mergedate@maximum}{%
-  \printlabeldateextra
-}{%
-  \printlabeldate
-}{}{}
 \xpatchcmd{\bbx@opt@mergedate@compact}{%
   \csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}dateextra}
 }{%
   \csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}date}
 }{}{}
-\xpatchcmd{\bbx@opt@mergedate@compact}{%
-  \printlabeldateextra
-}{%
-  \printlabeldate
-}{}{}
-\xpatchcmd{\bbx@opt@mergedate@year}{%
-  \printlabeldateextra
-}{%
-  \printlabeldate
-}{}{}
-\xpatchcmd{\bbx@opt@mergedate@basic}{%
-  \printlabeldateextra
-}{%
-  \printlabeldate
-}{}{}
-\xpatchcmd{\bbx@opt@mergedate@minimum}{%
-  \printlabeldateextra
-}{%
-  \printlabeldate
-}{}{}
-\xpatchcmd{\bbx@opt@mergedate@false}{%
+\xpatchbibmacro{labeldate}{%
   \printlabeldateextra
 }{%
   \printlabeldate
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph.cbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph.cbx
index b185a9b56ca..72864e74f02 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph.cbx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph.cbx
@@ -13,11 +13,12 @@
 %% See:     http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
 %% ----------------------------------------------------------------
 %% 
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
 \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
 \ProvidesFile{oxalph.cbx}
     [\Version\space Alphabetic citation style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
 \RequireCitationStyle{alphabetic}
+\renewcommand*{\multicitedelim}{\addsemicolon\space}
 \renewcommand*{\compcitedelim}{\addsemicolon\space}
 \renewcommand*{\postnotedelim}{\addcolon\space}
 \xpatchbibmacro{textcite}{%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph.dbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph.dbx
index 0dd8da08fa1..f62f22d2af1 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph.dbx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph.dbx
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
 %% See:     http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
 %% ----------------------------------------------------------------
 %% 
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
 \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
 \ProvidesFile{oxalph.dbx}
     [\Version\space Data model for the Oxref family of styles]
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes.bbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes.bbx
index 94e0778d790..9b4b607cf20 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes.bbx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes.bbx
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
 %% See:     http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
 %% ----------------------------------------------------------------
 %% 
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
 \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
 \ProvidesFile{oxnotes.bbx}
     [\Version\space Footnote-based bibliography style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes.cbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes.cbx
index 384ee890fa2..e525ac8db3f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes.cbx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes.cbx
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
 %% See:     http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
 %% ----------------------------------------------------------------
 %% 
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
 \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
 \ProvidesFile{oxnotes.cbx}
     [\Version\space Footnote-based citation style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes.dbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes.dbx
index 101d00fc48f..a1b9e8b83b2 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes.dbx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes.dbx
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
 %% See:     http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
 %% ----------------------------------------------------------------
 %% 
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
 \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
 \ProvidesFile{oxnotes.dbx}
     [\Version\space Data model for the Oxref family of styles]
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum.bbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum.bbx
index efb102d0b53..66330d82aab 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum.bbx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum.bbx
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
 %% See:     http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
 %% ----------------------------------------------------------------
 %% 
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
 \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
 \ProvidesFile{oxnum.bbx}
     [\Version\space Numeric bibliography style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum.cbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum.cbx
index 4fa5e4ab329..02dafba84ea 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum.cbx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum.cbx
@@ -13,11 +13,12 @@
 %% See:     http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
 %% ----------------------------------------------------------------
 %% 
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
 \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
 \ProvidesFile{oxnum.cbx}
     [\Version\space Numeric citation style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
 \RequireCitationStyle{numeric-comp}
+\renewcommand*{\multicitedelim}{\addsemicolon\space}
 \renewcommand*{\compcitedelim}{\addsemicolon\space}
 \renewcommand*{\postnotedelim}{\addcolon\space}
 \xpatchbibmacro{textcite}{%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum.dbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum.dbx
index 488296fc80b..c6aa1fb296c 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum.dbx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum.dbx
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
 %% See:     http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
 %% ----------------------------------------------------------------
 %% 
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
 \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
 \ProvidesFile{oxnum.dbx}
     [\Version\space Data model for the Oxref family of styles]
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.bbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.bbx
index ce8086d62e7..acfede01a6d 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.bbx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.bbx
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
 %% See:     http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
 %% ----------------------------------------------------------------
 %% 
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
 \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
 \ProvidesFile{oxref.bbx}
     [\Version\space Base settings for bibliography styles inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
@@ -22,8 +22,9 @@
 \RequirePackage{graphicx}
 \DeclareLanguageMappingSuffix{-oxref}
 \NewBibliographyString{%
-  director, performer, reader, conductor,
-  bydirector, byperformer, byreader, byconductor, byserieseditor,
+  director, performer, reader, conductor, serieseditor, holder, editorcm,
+  directors, performers, readers, conductors, serieseditors, holders, editorcms,
+  bydirector, byperformer, byreader, byconductor, byserieseditor, byholder, byeditorcm,
   facsimile, revised, revisedenlarged, revisedreprint, suppto, equals, original,
   inpressin,
   book, books, canto, cantos, stanza, stanzas, act, acts, scene, scenes, folio, folios,
@@ -33,8 +34,9 @@
   articletotal, articletotals, clausetotal, clausetotals, regulationtotal,
   regulationtotals, ruletotal, ruletotals,
   facebook, tweet, podcast, clip, webcast, poster,
-  nolocation, modified, recorded, uploaded,
+  nolocation, modified, recorded, uploaded, filed, issued,
   anon, pseudo, urldown,
+  countryjp, patentjp, patreqjp,
   1column, 2column, inflayer, suplayer, paper, papyrus, pergament,
   eucase, eujoinedcases, commissiondecision, application,
   order, bill, draft, opened, signed, adopted, inforce,
@@ -62,6 +64,8 @@
 \newtoggle{blx@ox@nametitle}\toggletrue{blx@ox@nametitle}%
 \DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{usenametitles}[true]{%
   \settoggle{blx@ox@nametitle}{#1}}
+\DeclareTypeOption[boolean]{usenametitles}[true]{%
+  \settoggle{blx@ox@nametitle}{#1}}
 \DeclareEntryOption[boolean]{usenametitles}[true]{%
   \settoggle{blx@ox@nametitle}{#1}}
 \newbibmacro*{name:title-given-family}[5]{%
@@ -455,6 +459,7 @@
       \setunit{\addspace}}}%
   {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash}}
 \DeclareFieldFormat{authortype}{\mkbibparens{#1}}
+\newcommand{\titlebyauthordelim}{\addspace}
 \renewbibmacro*{editor}{%
   \usebibmacro{bbx:editor}{editorstrg}}
 \renewbibmacro*{editor+others}{%
@@ -611,6 +616,8 @@
 \newtoggle{blx@ox@timefirst}
 \DeclareBibliographyOption{timefirst}[true]{%
   \settoggle{blx@ox@timefirst}{#1}}
+\DeclareTypeOption{timefirst}[true]{%
+  \settoggle{blx@ox@timefirst}{#1}}
 \DeclareEntryOption{timefirst}[true]{%
   \settoggle{blx@ox@timefirst}{#1}}
 \newbibmacro*{date+time}{%
@@ -657,6 +664,18 @@
     \setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
     \printorigtime}%
 }
+\DeclareFieldFormat{date}{%
+  \def\currentfield{date}%
+  \iffieldannotation{inferred}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}{#1}%
+  \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{origdate}{%
+  \def\currentfield{origdate}%
+  \iffieldannotation{inferred}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}{#1}%
+  \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{eventdate}{%
+  \def\currentfield{eventdate}%
+  \iffieldannotation{inferred}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}{#1}%
+  \undef\currentfield}
 \xpatchfieldformat{edition}{%
   #1\isdot
 }{%
@@ -733,7 +752,6 @@
     \do\={\mathbin{}\mskip-\Urlmuskip\mathchar`\=\mskip\Urlmuskip}%
     \do\?{\mathbin{}\mskip-\Urlmuskip\mathchar`\?\mskip\Urlmuskip}%
     \do\_{\mathbin{}\mskip-\Urlmuskip\_\mskip\Urlmuskip}%
-    \do\@{\mathbin{}\mskip-\Urlmuskip\@\mskip\Urlmuskip}%
     \do\#{\mathbin{}\mskip-\Urlmuskip\#\mskip\Urlmuskip}%
   }%
   \ifnumgreater{\value{biburlnumpenalty}}{0}
@@ -780,7 +798,7 @@
 \DeclareFieldFormat{pubstate}{\mkbibparens{#1}}
 \DeclareFieldFormat{howpublished}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}
 \DeclareFieldFormat[misc,unpublished]{howpublished}{#1}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[article,periodical,review]{entrysubtype}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[article,periodical,suppperiodical,review]{entrysubtype}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}
 \newcommand*{\blx@ox@abbrevstring}{%
   A\^{A}BCDEFG\u{G}HI\.{I}\^{I}JKLMNO\"{O}\^{O}PQRSTU\"{U}\^{U}VWXYZ.}%
 \AtBeginDocument{
@@ -884,8 +902,16 @@
 \newtoggle{blx@ox@varissuedate}
 \DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{varissuedate}[true]{%
   \settoggle{blx@ox@varissuedate}{#1}}
+\DeclareTypeOption[boolean]{varissuedate}[true]{%
+  \settoggle{blx@ox@varissuedate}{#1}}
 \DeclareEntryOption[boolean]{varissuedate}[true]{%
   \settoggle{blx@ox@varissuedate}{#1}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{issuedate-plain}[true]{%
+  \settoggle{blx@ox@varissuedate}{#1}}
+\DeclareTypeOption[boolean]{issuedate-plain}[true]{%
+  \settoggle{blx@ox@varissuedate}{#1}}
+\DeclareEntryOption[boolean]{issuedate-plain}[true]{%
+  \settoggle{blx@ox@varissuedate}{#1}}
 \renewbibmacro*{issue+date}{%
   \ifboolexpr{
     test {\iffieldundef{issue}}
@@ -928,7 +954,7 @@
   \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
   \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{title}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}%
@@ -990,16 +1016,61 @@
      \usebibmacro{related}}
     {}%
   \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppperiodical]{title}{%
+  \def\currentfield{title}%
+  \iffieldannotation{descriptor}{#1}{\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}%
+  \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppperiodical]{volume}{#1}% volume of a journal
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppperiodical]{number}{#1}% number of a journal
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppperiodical]{series}{% series of a journal
+  \ifinteger{#1}
+  {\mkbibordseries{#1}~\bibstring{jourser}}
+  {\ifbibstring{#1}{\bibstring{#1}}{#1}}}
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{suppperiodical}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+  \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{title}%
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}\clearfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{version}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle}%
+  \newunit
+  \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+  \iffieldequalstr{relatedtype}{suppto}{%
+    \setunit{\addsemicolon\space}%
+    \iftoggle{bbx:related}{%
+      \usebibmacro{related:init}%
+      \usebibmacro{related}%
+      \clearfield{related}%
+    }{}%
+  }{}%
+  \newunit
+  \usebibmacro{note+pages}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+    {\printfield{issn}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:related}
+    {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
+     \usebibmacro{related}}
+    {}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
 \ExecuteBibliographyOptions[book,mvbook,reference,mvreference]{useeditor=false,usetranslator=false}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[bookinbook]{citetitle}{%
-  \ifboolexpr{
-    test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{poem}}
-    or
-    test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{play}}
-  }{%
-    \mkbibemph{#1}%
-  }{%
-    \mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}}
 \DeclareFieldFormat[bookinbook]{title}{%
   \ifboolexpr{
     test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{poem}}
@@ -1045,6 +1116,16 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
     \usebibmacro{byserieseditor}%
     \setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
     \printfield{number}}
+\newtoggle{blx@ox@altbookseries}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{bookseries}[in]{%
+  \ifstrequal{#1}{out}{%
+    \toggletrue{blx@ox@altbookseries}%
+  }{%
+    \togglefalse{blx@ox@altbookseries}%
+    \ifstrequal{#1}{in}{}{%
+      \PackageError{oxref}
+      {Invalid option 'bookseries=#1'}
+      {Valid values are 'in' and 'out'.}}}}
 \newcounter{locpubpairs}
 \newbibmacro*{edition+publisher+location+date}{%
   \printlist{origlocation}%
@@ -1103,6 +1184,9 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \usebibmacro{date}%
 }
 \newbibmacro*{series+number+edition+publisher+location+date}{%
+  \iftoggle{blx@ox@altbookseries}{%
+    \usebibmacro{series+number}%
+    \setunit{\addspace}\newblock}{}%
   \ifboolexpr{
     test {\iffieldundef{series}}
     and
@@ -1122,8 +1206,9 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   }{}{%
     \nopunct
     \printtext[publication]{%
-    \usebibmacro{series+number}%
-    \setunit{\addsemicolon\addspace}%
+    \iftoggle{blx@ox@altbookseries}{}{%
+      \usebibmacro{series+number}%
+      \setunit{\addsemicolon\addspace}}%
     \usebibmacro{edition+publisher+location+date}%
     \usebibmacro{copub}}}%
   \iffieldequalstr{relatedtype}{copub}{\clearfield{related}}%
@@ -1131,6 +1216,9 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \usebibmacro{origpub}%
 }
 \newbibmacro*{series+number+publisher+location+date}{%
+  \iftoggle{blx@ox@altbookseries}{%
+    \usebibmacro{series+number}%
+    \setunit{\addspace}\newblock}{}%
   \ifboolexpr{
     test {\iffieldundef{series}}
     and
@@ -1148,8 +1236,9 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   }{}{%
     \nopunct
     \printtext[publication]{%
-    \usebibmacro{series+number}%
-    \setunit{\addsemicolon\addspace}%
+    \iftoggle{blx@ox@altbookseries}{}{%
+      \usebibmacro{series+number}%
+      \setunit{\addsemicolon\addspace}}%
     \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
     \usebibmacro{copub}}}%
   \iffieldequalstr{relatedtype}{copub}{\clearfield{related}}%
@@ -1186,7 +1275,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
   \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{title}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
@@ -1232,7 +1321,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   }{}{%
     \printfield{volume}%
     \printfield{part}}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
@@ -1277,7 +1366,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
   \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{title}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{in:}%
@@ -1295,7 +1384,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \printfield{volumes}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \printfield{note}%
-  \newunit\newblock%
+  \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{series+number+edition+publisher+location+date}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
@@ -1315,14 +1404,61 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
     \usebibmacro{related}}
   {}%
   \usebibmacro{finentry}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[suppbook]{title}{#1\nopunct}
-\DeclareBibliographyDriver{bookinbook}{%
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppbook]{title}{%
+  \def\currentfield{title}%
+  \iffieldannotation{descriptor}{#1}{\mkbibemph{#1}}%
+  \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{suppbook}{%
   \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
   \usebibmacro{begentry}%
   \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
   \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{title}%
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \setunit{\addspace}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{in:}%
+  \usebibmacro{bybookauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}%
+  \newunit
+  \iffieldundef{maintitle}
+  {\printfield{volume}%
+    \printfield{part}}
+  {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{volumes}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{series+number+edition+publisher+location+date}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+  {\printfield{isbn}}
+  {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:related}
+  {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
+    \usebibmacro{related}}
+  {}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{bookinbook}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+  \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{title}%
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{in:}%
@@ -1341,7 +1477,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \newunit\newblock
   \printfield{note}%
   \newunit\newblock
-  \usebibmacro{series+number+publisher+location+date}%
+  \usebibmacro{series+number+edition+publisher+location+date}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
   \newunit\newblock
@@ -1451,7 +1587,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
   \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{title}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{in:}%
@@ -1487,6 +1623,52 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
     \usebibmacro{related}}
   {}%
   \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppcollection]{title}{%
+  \def\currentfield{title}%
+  \iffieldannotation{descriptor}{#1}{\mkbibemph{#1}}%
+  \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{suppcollection}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+  \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{title}%
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \setunit{\addspace}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{in:}%
+  \usebibmacro{bookeditor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}%
+  \newunit
+  \iffieldundef{maintitle}
+  {\printfield{volume}%
+    \printfield{part}}
+  {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{volumes}%
+  \newunit\newblock%
+  \usebibmacro{series+number+edition+publisher+location+date}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+  {\printfield{isbn}}
+  {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:related}
+  {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
+    \usebibmacro{related}}
+  {}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
 \DeclareBibliographyDriver{reference}{%
   \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
   \usebibmacro{begentry}%
@@ -1495,7 +1677,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \usebibmacro{title}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \printfield{edition}%
-  \newunit
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
@@ -1541,7 +1723,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
     \printfield{part}}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \printfield{edition}%
-  \newunit
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
@@ -1586,7 +1768,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
   \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{title}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \iffieldundef{editor}{}{%
@@ -1634,18 +1816,10 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \printfield{eventtitle}%
   \newunit
   \printfield{eventtitleaddon}%
-  \ifboolexpr{
-    test {\iffieldundef{venue}}
-    and
-    test {\iffieldundef{eventyear}}
-  }{}{%
-    \iffieldundef{eventtitle}{%
-      \setunit{\mkbibemph{\addcomma}\space}%
-    }{%
-      \newunit}%
-    \printfield{venue}%
-    \newunit%
-    \printeventdate}%
+  \newunit
+  \printfield{venue}%
+  \newunit%
+  \printeventdate%
   \newunit}
 \DeclareBibliographyDriver{proceedings}{%
   \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
@@ -1696,7 +1870,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
   \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{title}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{in:}%
@@ -1791,9 +1965,28 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
       \setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
       \usebibmacro{date}}}}
 \newtoggle{blx@ox@altthesis}
+\newtoggle{blx@ox@plainthesis}
+\DeclareFieldAlias{thesis:publication}{publication}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{plain}{#1}
 \DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{altthesis}[true]{%
   \settoggle{blx@ox@altthesis}{#1}
 }
+\DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{thesis}[out]{%
+  \ifstrequal{#1}{plain}{%
+    \toggletrue{blx@ox@altthesis}%
+    \toggletrue{blx@ox@plainthesis}%
+    \DeclareFieldAlias{thesis:publication}{plain}%
+  }{%
+    \togglefalse{blx@ox@plainthesis}%
+    \DeclareFieldAlias{thesis:publication}{publication}%
+    \ifstrequal{#1}{in}{%
+      \toggletrue{blx@ox@altthesis}%
+    }{%
+      \togglefalse{blx@ox@altthesis}%
+      \ifstrequal{#1}{out}{}{%
+        \PackageError{oxref}
+        {Invalid option 'bookseries=#1'}
+        {Valid values are 'in', 'out', and 'plain'.}}}}}
 \newbibmacro*{type+institution+location+date}{%
   \iftoggle{blx@ox@altthesis}{%
     \ifboolexpr{
@@ -1809,8 +2002,8 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
       and
       test {\iffieldundef{month}}
     }{}{%
-      \nopunct
-      \printtext[publication]{%
+      \iftoggle{blx@ox@plainthesis}{}{\nopunct}%
+      \printtext[thesis:publication]{%
         \printfield{type}%
         \setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
         \printlist{location}%
@@ -1880,7 +2073,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   {\printfield{volume}%
     \printfield{part}}
   {}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \printfield{version}%
@@ -1920,20 +2113,118 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 }{%
   \usebibmacro{type+institution+location+date}%
 }{}{}
-\DeclareBibliographyDriver{manual}{%
+\DeclareFieldFormat[booklet]{title}{%
+  \def\currentfield{title}%
+  \iffieldannotation{descriptor}{#1}{%
+    \mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}%
+  \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[patent]{title}{\mkbibemph{#1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[patent]{type}{\ifbibstring{#1}{\biblstring{#1}}{#1}}
+\DeclareNameAlias{byholder}{default}
+\renewbibmacro*{byholder}{%
+  \ifnameundef{holder}{}{%
+    \bibstring{byholder}%
+    \setunit{\addspace}%
+    \printnames[byholder]{holder}}}
+\newbibmacro*{location+dates}{%
+  \ifboolexpr{
+    test {\iffieldundef{location}}
+    and
+    test {\iffieldundef{origyear}}
+    and
+    test {\iffieldundef{origmonth}}
+    and
+    test {\iffieldundef{year}}
+    and
+    test {\iffieldundef{month}}
+  }{}{%
+    \nopunct
+    \printtext[publication]{%
+      \printlist[][-\value{listtotal}]{location}%
+      \setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
+      \ifboolexpr{
+        test {\iffieldundef{origyear}}
+        and
+        test {\iffieldundef{origmonth}}
+      }{}{%
+        \iffieldundef{origdatetype}{%
+          \bibstring{filed}
+        }{
+          \printfield{origdatetype}}%
+        \setunit*{\addspace}}%
+      \usebibmacro{origdate+time}%
+      \setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
+      \ifboolexpr{
+        test {\iffieldundef{year}}
+        and
+        test {\iffieldundef{month}}
+      }{}{%
+        \iffieldundef{datetype}{%
+          \bibstring{issued}%
+        }{
+          \printfield{datetype}}%
+        \setunit*{\addspace}}%
+      \usebibmacro{date}}}}
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{patent}{%
   \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
   \usebibmacro{begentry}%
-  \usebibmacro{author/editor}%
+  \usebibmacro{author}%
   \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{title}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \newunit
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
-  \usebibmacro{byeditor}%
+  \printfield{note}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \printfield{type}%
+  \setunit*{\addspace}%
+  \printfield{number}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byholder}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{location+dates}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:related}
+    {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
+     \usebibmacro{related}}
+    {}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{manual}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \ifboolexpr{
+    test {\ifentrytype{standard}}
+    and
+    ( test {\ifnameundef{author}}
+      or
+      not test \ifuseauthor )
+    and
+    not test {\iffieldundef{number}}
+  }{%
+    \printfield{number}\clearfield{number}%
+    \newunit\newblock
+  }{}%
+  \usebibmacro{author/editor}%
+  \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
+  \ifentrytype{software}{%
+    \usebibmacro{title+version}%
+  }{%
+    \usebibmacro{title}}%
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byeditor}%
   \newunit
-  \printfield{version}%
+  \ifentrytype{software}{}{%
+    \newunit\printfield{version}}%
   \newunit
   \printfield{note}%
   \newunit\newblock
@@ -1958,6 +2249,8 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
     \usebibmacro{related}}
   {}%
   \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{standard}{manual}
+\ExecuteBibliographyOptions[standard]{useeditor=false}
 \newbibmacro*{publisher+type+series+number+date}{%
   \iffieldundef{number}{}{%
     \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
@@ -1982,11 +2275,11 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
     and
     test {\iffieldundef{month}}
     and
-    test {\iffieldundef{eventyear}}
+    test {\iffieldundef{origyear}}
     and
-    test {\iffieldundef{eventseason}}
+    test {\iffieldundef{origseason}}
     and
-    test {\iffieldundef{eventmonth}}
+    test {\iffieldundef{origmonth}}
     and
     test {\iffieldundef{hour}}
   }{}{%
@@ -2044,7 +2337,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   }{}%
   \setunit{\addspace}
   \usebibmacro{onlinetype}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{pre-byeditor+others}%
@@ -2085,7 +2378,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \usebibmacro{author}%
   \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{title}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{in:}%
@@ -2195,10 +2488,83 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
       \mkbibemph{#1}}}%
   \undef\currentfield}
 
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{image}{online}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[image]{title}{\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{performance}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \usebibmacro{author}%
+  \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{title}%
+  \newunit
+  \usebibmacro{maintitle}%
+  \iffieldequalstr{relatedtype}{includes}{%
+    \iftoggle{bbx:related}{%
+      \newunit\newblock
+      \usebibmacro{related:init}%
+      \usebibmacro{related}%
+      \clearfield{related}%
+    }{}%
+  }{}%
+  \setunit{\addspace}
+  \usebibmacro{onlinetype}%
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pre-byeditor+others}%
+  \setunit{\addspace}%
+  \printfield{howpublished}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{type}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \ifboolexpr{
+    test {\iffieldundef{origyear}}
+    and
+    test {\iffieldundef{origmonth}}
+  }{}{%
+    \setunit{\addspace}\newblock
+    \printtext[publication]{\usebibmacro{origdate+time}}}
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{event+venue+location+date}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{post-byeditor+others}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printlist{organization}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+  {\printfield{isbn}}
+  {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:related}
+  {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
+    \usebibmacro{related}}
+  {}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{image}{performance}
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{artwork}{performance}
+\renewbibmacro*{event+venue+location+date}{%
+  \printfield{eventtitle}%
+  \newunit
+  \printfield{eventtitleaddon}%
+  \newunit
+  \printlist{institution}%
+  \newunit
+  \printfield{venue}%
+  \newunit
+  \printlist{location}%
+  \newunit%
+  \ifboolexpr{
+    test {\iffieldundef{year}}
+    and
+    test {\iffieldundef{month}}
+  }{\printeventdate}{\usebibmacro{date+time}}}
 
-\DeclareFieldFormat[online]{title}{%
+\DeclareFieldFormat[online,image]{title}{%
   \def\currentfield{title}%
   \iffieldannotation{descriptor}{#1}{\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}%
   \undef\currentfield}
@@ -2222,7 +2588,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \usebibmacro{maintitle}
   \setunit{\addspace}%
   \usebibmacro{onlinetype}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
@@ -2272,42 +2638,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
 }
 \DeclareFieldFormat[software]{version}{\mkbibparens{\bibstring{version}~#1}}
 \DeclareFieldFormat[software]{urldate}{\bibstring{urldown}\space#1}
-\DeclareBibliographyDriver{software}{%
-  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
-  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
-  \usebibmacro{author/editor}%
-  \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
-  \usebibmacro{title+version}%
-  \newunit\newblock
-  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
-  \newunit\newblock
-  \usebibmacro{byeditor}%
-  \newunit\newblock
-  \printfield{type}%
-  \newunit
-  \printfield{note}%
-  \newunit\newblock
-  \usebibmacro{type+series+number+edition+organization+publisher+location+date}%
-  \newunit\newblock
-  \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
-  \newunit
-  \printfield{pagetotal}%
-  \newunit\newblock
-  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
-  {\printfield{isbn}}
-  {}%
-  \newunit\newblock
-  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
-  \newunit\newblock
-  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
-  \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
-  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
-  \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
-  \iftoggle{bbx:related}
-  {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
-    \usebibmacro{related}}
-  {}%
-  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{software}{manual}
 \DeclareBibliographyAlias{dataset}{manual}
 \newtoggle{bbx:scotstyle}
 \DeclareEntryOption{scottish-style}[true]{%
@@ -3210,12 +3541,16 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
     test {\ifnameundef{author}}
     and
     test {\iffieldundef{title}}
+    and
+    test {\iffieldundef{label}}
   }{}{\usebibmacro{date}}}
 \newbibmacro{dating}{%
   \ifboolexpr{(
       test {\ifnameundef{author}}
       and
       test {\iffieldundef{title}}
+      and
+      test {\iffieldundef{label}}
     ) or
     test {\iffieldundef{year}}
   }{%
@@ -3275,7 +3610,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \usebibmacro{author}%
   \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{title}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \printfield{howpublished}%
@@ -3323,13 +3658,13 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \usebibmacro{author}%
   \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{title}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
-  \printfield{howpublished}%
-  \newunit\newblock
   \printfield{note}%
   \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{howpublished}%
+  \newunit\newblock
   \iftoggle{blx@ox@ms}{%
     \usebibmacro{manuscript:date}%
     \newunit\newblock
@@ -3357,7 +3692,13 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
      \usebibmacro{related}}
     {}%
   \usebibmacro{finentry}}
-
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{letter}{unpublished}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[letter]{title}{%
+  \def\currentfield{title}%
+  \iffieldannotation{descriptor}{#1}{\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}%
+  \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[letter]{date}{%
+  \iffieldundef{url}{#1}{\mkbibparens{#1}}}
 \xpatchbibdriver{booklet}{%
   \newunit\newblock
   \iftoggle{bbx:related}
@@ -3372,13 +3713,6 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
   \iftoggle{bbx:related}
 }{}{}
-\xpatchbibdriver{patent}{%
-  \newunit\newblock
-  \iftoggle{bbx:related}
-}{%
-  \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
-  \iftoggle{bbx:related}
-}{}{}
 \DeclareBibliographyOption{relationpunct}[semicolon]{%
   \ifcsdef{add#1}{%
     \ifstrequal{#1}{space}{%
@@ -3391,6 +3725,18 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
     }{%
       Valid values are 'dot', 'comma', 'semicolon', 'colon',\MessageBreak
       'period', 'exclam', 'question', and 'space'.}}}
+\DeclareTypeOption{relationpunct}[semicolon]{%
+  \ifcsdef{add#1}{%
+    \ifstrequal{#1}{space}{%
+      \renewcommand*{\relatedtypepunct}{\addspace}%
+    }{%
+      \renewcommand*{\relatedtypepunct}{\csuse{add#1}\space}}%
+  }{%
+    \PackageError{biblatex-oxref}{%
+      Invalid option 'relationpunct=#1'%
+    }{%
+      Valid values are 'dot', 'comma', 'semicolon', 'colon',\MessageBreak
+      'period', 'exclam', 'question', and 'space'.}}}
 \newtoggle{blx@ox@relpunctset}
 \DeclareEntryOption{relationpunct}[semicolon]{%
   \ifcsdef{add#1}{%
@@ -3507,7 +3853,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
   \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{title}%
-  \newunit\newblock
+  \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}%
@@ -3703,6 +4049,14 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
         fieldvalue={=translator}]
     }
     \map[overwrite=false]{
+      \pertype{standard}
+      \step[notfield=author,
+            fieldsource=number,
+            final]
+      \step[fieldset=sortkey,
+            origfieldval]
+    }
+    \map[overwrite=false]{
       \pertype{audio}
       \pertype{music}
       \pertype{movie}
@@ -3973,8 +4327,8 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{%
   }
 }
 \ExecuteBibliographyOptions
-  [proceedings,report,audio,music,movie,video,manuscript,unpublished,review]%
-  {useeditor=false}
+  [proceedings,report,artwork,audio,image,music,movie,performance,video,%
+  manuscript,unpublished,review]{useeditor=false}
 %% 
 %% Copyright (C) 2016–2018 Alex Ball
 %%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear.bbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear.bbx
index d569b2b7532..63af99d76be 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear.bbx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear.bbx
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
 %% See:     http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
 %% ----------------------------------------------------------------
 %% 
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
 \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
 \ProvidesFile{oxyear.bbx}
     [\Version\space Author-year bibliography style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
@@ -26,8 +26,25 @@
        {Invalid option 'mergedate=#1'}
        {Valid values are 'maximum', 'compact', 'basic', 'minimum',\MessageBreak
         'year', 'true' (=year), and 'false'.}}}
+\DeclareTypeOption{mergedate}[true]{%
+  \ifcsdef{bbx@opt@mergedate@#1}
+    {\csuse{bbx@opt@mergedate@#1}}
+    {\PackageError{biblatex}
+       {Invalid option 'mergedate=#1'}
+       {Valid values are 'maximum', 'compact', 'basic', 'minimum',\MessageBreak
+        'year', 'true' (=year), and 'false'.}}}
 \providebibmacro*{date+extradate}{}
 \DeclareFieldFormat{datelabel}{\mkbibparens{#1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{labeldate}{%
+  \iflabeldateisdate{%
+    \def\currentfield{date}%
+  }{%
+    \iflabeldateisanydate{%
+      \def\currentfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}date}%
+    }{%
+      \def\currentfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}}%
+  \iffieldannotation{inferred}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}{#1}%
+  \undef\currentfield}
 \DeclareLabeldate{%
   \field{origdate}
   \field{date}
@@ -56,50 +73,62 @@
   \ifboolexpr{%
     not test {\iffieldundef{labeldatesource}}
     and test {\iffieldequalstr{labeldatesource}{pubstate}}}}
+\newtoggle{blx@ox@nonodate}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{nonodate}[true]{%
+  \settoggle{blx@ox@nonodate}{#1}}
+\DeclareTypeOption[boolean]{nonodate}[true]{%
+  \settoggle{blx@ox@nonodate}{#1}}
+\DeclareEntryOption[boolean]{nonodate}[true]{%
+  \settoggle{blx@ox@nonodate}{#1}}
+\newbibmacro*{labeldate}{%
+  \ifboolexpr{
+    test {\iffieldequalstr{labeldatesource}{nodate}}
+    and
+    togl {blx@ox@nonodate}
+  }{}{\printtext[datelabel]{\printlabeldateextra}}}
 
 \def\bbx@opt@mergedate@true{\bbx@opt@mergedate@year}
 \def\bbx@opt@mergedate@maximum{%
   \renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{%
     \iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{%
-      \printtext[datelabel]{%
-        \iflabeldateisdate{%
+      \iflabeldateisdate{%
+        \printtext[datelabel]{%
           \printfield{issue}\clearfield{issue}%
           \setunit*{\addspace}%
-          \printdateextra
-          \clearfield{year}\clearfield{season}\clearfield{month}\clearfield{day}%
+          \printdateextra}%
+        \clearfield{year}\clearfield{season}\clearfield{month}\clearfield{day}%
+      }{%
+        \iflabeldateisanydate{%
+          \printtext[datelabel]{%
+            \csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}dateextra}}%
+          \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}%
+          \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}season}%
+          \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}month}%
+          \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}day}%
         }{%
-          \iflabeldateisanydate{%
-            \csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}dateextra}%
-            \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}%
-            \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}season}%
-            \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}month}%
-            \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}day}%
-          }{%
-            \printlabeldateextra
-            \iflabeldateispubstate{}{\clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}%
-          }}}}}}
+          \usebibmacro{labeldate}%
+          \iflabeldateispubstate{}{\clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}}}}}}
 \def\bbx@opt@mergedate@compact{%
   \renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{%
     \iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{%
-      \printtext[datelabel]{%
-        \iflabeldateisdate{%
-          \printdateextra
-          \clearfield{year}\clearfield{season}\clearfield{month}\clearfield{day}%
+      \iflabeldateisdate{%
+        \printtext[datelabel]{\printdateextra}%
+        \clearfield{year}\clearfield{season}\clearfield{month}\clearfield{day}%
+      }{%
+        \iflabeldateisanydate{%
+          \printtext[datelabel]{%
+            \csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}dateextra}}%
+          \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}%
+          \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}season}%
+          \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}month}%
+          \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}day}%
         }{%
-          \iflabeldateisanydate{%
-            \csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}dateextra}%
-            \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}%
-            \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}season}%
-            \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}month}%
-            \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}day}%
-          }{%
-            \printlabeldateextra
-            \iflabeldateispubstate{}{\clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}%
-          }}}}}}
+          \usebibmacro{labeldate}%
+          \iflabeldateispubstate{}{\clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}}}}}}
 \def\bbx@opt@mergedate@year{%
   \renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{%
     \iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{%
-      \printtext[datelabel]{\printlabeldateextra}%
+      \usebibmacro{labeldate}%
       \iflabeldateisdate{%
         \clearfield{year}
       }{%
@@ -111,7 +140,7 @@
 \def\bbx@opt@mergedate@basic{%
   \renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{%
     \iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{%
-      \printtext[datelabel]{\printlabeldateextra}%
+      \usebibmacro{labeldate}%
       \iflabeldateisdate{%
         \ifboolexpr{
           test {\ifdateshavedifferentprecision{label}{}}
@@ -129,7 +158,7 @@
 \def\bbx@opt@mergedate@minimum{%
   \renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{%
     \iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{%
-      \printtext[datelabel]{\printlabeldateextra}%
+      \usebibmacro{labeldate}%
       \iflabeldateisdate{%
         \ifboolexpr{
           test {\ifdateshavedifferentprecision{label}{}}
@@ -153,7 +182,7 @@
 \def\bbx@opt@mergedate@false{%
   \renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{%
     \iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{%
-      \printtext[datelabel]{\printlabeldateextra}%
+      \usebibmacro{labeldate}%
       \iflabeldateisanydate{}{%
         \iflabeldateispubstate{}{\clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}%
       }}}}
@@ -411,9 +440,29 @@
     test {\iffieldundef{month}}
   }%
 }{}{}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[online,image]{citetitle}{\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[legislation,legal]{citetitle}{#1}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[manuscript,unpublished]{citetitle}{%
+\DeclareFieldFormat[bookinbook]{citetitle}{%
+  \ifboolexpr{
+    test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{poem}}
+    or
+    test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{play}}
+  }{%
+    \mkbibemph{#1}%
+  }{%
+    \mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppperiodical,inaudio,inmusic,inmovie,invideo,online,%
+    image,manuscript,unpublished]{citetitle}{%
+  \def\currentfield{title}%
+  \ifboolexpr{
+    test {\iffieldannotation{descriptor}}
+    or (
+      test {\iffieldundef{shorttitle}}
+      and
+      test {\iffieldundef{title}}
+    )
+  }{#1}{\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}%
+  \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppperiodical,inaudio,inmusic,inmovie,invideo,online,%
+    image,manuscript,unpublished]{citetitle}{%
   \def\currentfield{title}%
   \ifboolexpr{
     test {\iffieldannotation{descriptor}}
@@ -424,6 +473,60 @@
     )
   }{#1}{\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}%
   \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[audio,music]{citetitle}{%
+  \def\currentfield{title}%
+  \ifboolexpr{
+    test {\iffieldannotation{descriptor}}
+    or (
+      test {\iffieldundef{shorttitle}}
+      and
+      test {\iffieldundef{title}}
+    )
+  }{#1}{%
+    \iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{podcast}{%
+      \mkbibquote{#1\isdot}%
+    }{%
+      \mkbibemph{#1}}}%
+  \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[movie,video]{citetitle}{%
+  \def\currentfield{title}%
+  \ifboolexpr{
+    test {\iffieldannotation{descriptor}}
+    or (
+      test {\iffieldundef{shorttitle}}
+      and
+      test {\iffieldundef{title}}
+    )
+  }{#1}{%
+    \ifboolexpr{
+      test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{episode}}
+      or
+      test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{clip}}
+      or
+      test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{webcast}}
+    }{%
+      \mkbibquote{#1\isdot}%
+    }{%
+      \mkbibemph{#1}}}%
+  \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[legislation,legal]{citetitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[misc]%
+    {citetitle}{%
+  \def\currentfield{title}%
+  \ifboolexpr{
+    test {\iffieldannotation{descriptor}}
+    or (
+      test {\iffieldundef{shorttitle}}
+      and
+      test {\iffieldundef{title}}
+    )
+  }{#1}{%
+    \iffieldequalstr{relatedtype}{in}{%
+      \mkbibquote{#1\isdot}%
+    }{%
+      \mkbibemph{#1}%
+    }}%
+  \undef\currentfield}
 
 \renewcommand*{\bibpagespunct}{%
   \ifboolexpr{
@@ -438,16 +541,31 @@
     \addcomma\space
   }%
 }
-\DeclareFieldFormat[manuscript]{datelabel}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[unpublished]{datelabel}{%
-  \iftoggle{blx@ox@ms}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}{\mkbibparens{#1}}}
-\renewbibmacro*{manuscript:date}{\usebibmacro{date}}
 \DeclareLabeltitle{%
   \field{shorttitle}
   \field{title}
   \field{maintitle}
   \field{library}
 }
+\DeclareStyleSourcemap{%
+  \maps[datatype=bibtex]{%
+    \map[overwrite=true]{
+      \step[notmatch=\regexp{nonodate}, fieldsource=options, final]
+      \step[fieldsource=sortyear, final]
+      \step[fieldset=options, append, fieldvalue={,nonodate}]
+    }
+    \map[overwrite=true]{
+      \step[notfield=options, final]
+      \step[fieldsource=sortyear, final]
+      \step[fieldset=options, fieldvalue={nonodate}]
+    }
+    \map[overwrite=false]{
+      \pertype{standard}
+      \step[notfield=author,
+            fieldsource=number,
+            fieldtarget=label]
+    }
+}}
 
 %% 
 %% Copyright (C) 2016–2018 Alex Ball
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear.cbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear.cbx
index 2f807628edb..047dbed9316 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear.cbx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear.cbx
@@ -13,22 +13,20 @@
 %% See:     http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
 %% ----------------------------------------------------------------
 %% 
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
 \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
 \ProvidesFile{oxyear.cbx}
     [\Version\space Author-year citation style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
 \RequireCitationStyle{authoryear-comp}
 \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{uniquename=init}
-\xpatchbibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}{%
-  \printfield{labelendyear}%
-}{%
-  \iffieldundef{extradate}{%
-    \blx@ox@compyear
-      {\thefield{labelyear}}%
-      {\thefield{labelendyear}}%
-  }{%
-    \printfield{labelendyear}}%
-}{}{}
+\newbibmacro*{cite:labeldate+extradate}{%
+  \ifboolexpr{
+    test {\iffieldundef{labelyear}}
+    or
+    ( test {\iffieldequalstr{labeldatesource}{nodate}}
+      and
+      togl {blx@ox@nonodate} )
+  }{}{\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printlabeldateextra}}}
 \xpatchbibmacro{cite}{%
   \printnames{labelname}%
 }{%
@@ -52,6 +50,7 @@
   \iflabeldateisanydate
     {\addspace}%
     {\addcomma\space}}
+\renewcommand*{\multicitedelim}{\addsemicolon\space}
 \renewcommand*{\compcitedelim}{\addsemicolon\space}
 \renewcommand*{\postnotedelim}{\addcolon\space}
 \xpatchbibmacro{textcite}{%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear.dbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear.dbx
index 26cef3f2849..3cc2c63eed0 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear.dbx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear.dbx
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
 %% See:     http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
 %% ----------------------------------------------------------------
 %% 
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
 \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
 \ProvidesFile{oxyear.dbx}
     [\Version\space Data model for the Oxref family of styles]